Canon imageRUNNER 5020 Series User`s guide

・I
Pus_299
Black
PANTONE
299
Reference Guide
The contents of this guide are
Reference Guide
printed on 100% recycled paper.
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON U.S.A., INC.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
CANON CANADA INC.
6390 Dixie Road Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61 P.O. Box 2262, 1180 EG Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON FRANCE S.A.
17, quai du Président Paul Doumer 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON (U.K.) LTD.
Woodhatch, Reigate, Surrey, RH2 8BF, United Kingdom
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.
Palazzo L Strada 6 20089 Milanofiori Rozzano (MI) Italy
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
703 Waterford Way Suite 400 Miami, Florida 33126 U.S.A.
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney, N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
ENG
79 Anson Road #09-01/06, Singapore 079906
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD
9/F, The Hong Kong Club Building, 3A Chater Road, Central, Hong Kong
FA7-4486 (010)
062003IS3
C CANON INC. 2003
PRINTED IN JAPAN
Read this guide first.
Please read this guide before operating this equipment.
After you finish reading this guide, store it in a safe place for future reference.
ENG
imageRUNNER
6020i/5020i
6020/5020
Reference Guide
Manuals for the Machine
The manuals for this machine are divided as follows. Please refer to them for detailed information.
The manuals supplied with optional equipment are included in the list below. Depending on the system
configuration and product purchased, some manuals may not be needed.
Guides with this symbol are printed manuals.
• Basic Operations
• Troubleshooting
• Copying Instructions
• Mail Box Instructions
• Sending Instructions
• Setting Up the Network Connection and
Installing the CD-ROM Software
• Remote User Interface Instructions
• Network Connectivity and Setup Instructions
• Network ScanGear Installation and
Instructions
• PS/PCL Printer Instructions
• PCL Printer Driver Installation and
Instructions
• PS Printer Driver Installation and
Instructions
• Installing MEAP Applications and
Using the Login Service
CD-ROM
Guides with this symbol are PDF manuals included on the
accompanying CD-ROM.
Reference Guide
(This Document)
Copying Guide
Mail Box Guide
Sending Guide
Network Quick Start Guide
Remote UI Guide
CD-ROM
Network Guide
CD-ROM
Network ScanGear
User's Guide
CD-ROM
PS/PCL Printer Guide
CD-ROM
PCL Driver Guide
CD-ROM
PS Driver Guide
CD-ROM
MEAP SMS Administrator
Guide
CD-ROM
Considerable effort has been made to make sure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions.
How This Manual Is Organized
Chap 1
Before You Start Using This Machine
Chap 2
Checking Job and Device Status
2
Chap 3
Customizing Settings
3
Chap 4
System Manager Settings
4
Chap 5
Routine Maintenance
5
Chap 6
Troubleshooting
6
Chap 7
Optional Equipment
7
Chap 8
Appendix
8
Please read this chapter
Includes sample reports, the specifications of the main unit, the Relationship between
Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart, and the index.
Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our
products, if you need an exact specification, please contact Canon.
1
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Symbols Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xi
Keys Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xi
Displays Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Illustrations Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Legal Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
FCC (Federal Communications Commission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Laser Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
CDRH Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiv
International Energy Star Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi
Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi
Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xix
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Maintenance and Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxiv
Other Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxiv
Periodic Inspection of the Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use
of Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii
Operations and Terms Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix
Chapter 1
Before You Start Using This Machine
Installation Location and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Select a Safe Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Provide Adequate Installation Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Moving the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
What This Machine Can Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
Switching the Functions Indicated on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
New Functions Can Be Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
iv
Contents
Setting Specifications to Suit Your Needs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Functions That Conserve Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Checking, Changing, and Canceling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Displaying a Guide Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Reading Messages from the System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Types of Message Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Other Useful Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Parts and Their Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
External View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Internal View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Control Panel Parts and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Checking the Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Checking Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Main Power and Control Panel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
How to Turn ON the Main Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32
Control Panel Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38
System Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Using the Touch Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Frequently Used Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40
Touch Panel Key Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41
Adjusting the Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Entering Alphabet Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43
Entering Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-45
Entering Values in Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47
Entering the Department ID and Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
Operations after Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-48
Operations after Using Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50
Logging in through the Authentication Screens of SDL and SSO . . . . . . . . 1-51
Placing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
Orientation of Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-56
Placing an Original on the Platen Glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57
Placing Originals in the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63
Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-69
Multifunctional Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
Available Paper Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
Chapter 2
Checking Job and Device Status
Checking Job and Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Confirmation/Cancellation of the Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Contents
v
Checking Job Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Checking Copy and Print Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Printing the Copy and Print Job Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Checking Send Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Performing Send Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Changing the Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Resending a Send Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Printing the Send Job Status/Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Checking Received Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Performing Received Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Printing a Received Job Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Checking Received I-Fax Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Checking Forwarded Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Canceling from the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Canceling Using the Stop Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Canceling a Job from the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Priority Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Handling Print Jobs Sent from a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Printing Secured Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Chapter 3
Customizing Settings
Additional Functions Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function
(Common Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Selecting the Default Display after Auto Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Setting the Entry Tone, Error Tone, and the Job Done Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Setting Inch Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/
Auto Drawer Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Setting Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Distinguishing between LTRR and STMT Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Setting a Dedicated Tray for Each Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Setting the Printing Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Storing an Image Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Checking Image Form Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Erasing an Image Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Setting the Standard Local Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Changing the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Reversing the Display Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
vi
Contents
Setting the Offset Jobs Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Setting the Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48
Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing Operations . . . . . . . .3-52
Setting the Time for the Display to Return to the Basic Features
Screen after Finishing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54
Setting the Time for the Unit to Quiet Down after the Last Task . . . . . . . . . .3-55
Setting the Time for the Unit’s Power to Turn OFF on Different Days
of the Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-57
Setting the Low-Power Mode Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58
Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Making a Zoom Fine Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60
Staple Repositioning for the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-61
Changing the Saddle Stitch Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-63
Adjusting the Standard Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-65
Adjusting the Page Number Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-66
Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Specifying Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-68
Send Result Report (TX Report). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-68
Setting the Specifications of an Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-71
Printing Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-75
Printing the Address Book List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-75
Printing the Additional Functions Settings List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-78
Chapter 4
System Manager Settings
Specifying the System Manager Settings (System Manager Settings) . . . . . 4-3
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Storing the Department ID, Password, and Impression Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Changing the Password and Impression Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Erasing the Department ID and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Checking and Printing Counter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Erasing Print Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Setting to Accept Print Jobs with an Unknown ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings) . . . . 4-32
E-mail/I-Fax Send Settings (E-mail/I-Fax Settings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Memory RX Inbox Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Setting the Memory RX Inbox Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Storing Received I-Fax Documents in Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Memory Lock Start Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Memory Lock End Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46
Specifying the Settings for the Remote UI (Remote UI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Setting Access Restriction to an Address Book
(Manage/Access to Address Book) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Contents
vii
Setting a Password for an Address Book (Address Book Password) . . . . . 4-52
Setting Access Number Management for an Address Book
(Access Number Management) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Setting Device Information (Device Information Settings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58
Storing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Storing Forwarding Destinations When the Forwarding Conditions
Do Not Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Checking/Changing Forwarding Setting Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Forwarding Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Deleting a Forwarding Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Printing a Forwarding Settings List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Erasing a Message Board (Clear Message Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88
Auto Online/Offline (Auto Online/Offline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90
Setting Auto Online (Auto Online) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Setting Auto Offline (Auto Offline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Setting MEAP Settings (MEAP Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-93
Setting Use HTTP Server (Use HTTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Printing Installed Applications’ Information (Print System Information) . . . 4-95
LDAP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-97
Registering an LDAP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Changing an LDAP Server Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Deleting an LDAP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Printing LDAP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Chapter 5
Routine Maintenance
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Adding Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Routine Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Cleaning the Platen Glass/Rear Side of the Platen Glass Cover . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Cleaning the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Cleaning the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
When an Original or Print Becomes Dirty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
While Using the Feeder (Feeder Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Output Sheets Are Dirty (Wire Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Consumables and Optional Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Optional Equipment for the Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
viii
Contents
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Screen Shown When There Is a Paper Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Clearing Paper Jams in the Main Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Clearing Paper Jams Inside the Right Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Clearing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17
Clearing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-20
Clearing Paper Jams in the Stack Bypass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24
Clearing Paper Jams in Paper Drawers 3 or 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-27
Clearing Paper Jams in the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
List of Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Self-Diagnostic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34
List of Error Codes without Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Service Call Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
When Calling Your Local Authorized Canon Dealer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-50
When the Power Does Not Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Chapter 7
Optional Equipment
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Paper Deck-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Clearing Paper Jams in the Paper Deck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Loading Paper in the Paper Deck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Finishing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
Clearing Paper Jams in the Finisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Replacing the Staple Cartridge in the Stapler Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Removing Jammed Staples from the Stapler Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Clearing Paper Jams in the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25
Replacing the Saddle Stitcher Unit’s Staple Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29
Removing Jammed Staples from the Saddle Stitcher Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32
Clearing Paper Jams in the Puncher Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37
Removing Punch Waste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42
Copy Tray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43
Clearing Paper Jams in the Copy Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-44
Card Reader-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Operations before Using the Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Operations after Using the Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-49
Contents
ix
Department ID Management When Using the Card Reader-C1 . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Changing the Password and Impression Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Checking and Printing Counter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Erasing Print Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Setting to Accept Print Jobs with an Unknown ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
Chapter 8
Appendix
Sample Reports and Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Send Job List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
TX Report/TX Error Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Activity Report TX/RX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Copy Log List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Print Log List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Forwarding Conditions List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Registered LDAP Server List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Address Book List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
User’s Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Paper Deck-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Puncher Unit-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Copy Tray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Card Reader-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper
Output Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
x
Contents
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the Canon imageRUNNER 6020i/5020i or imageRUNNER
6020/5020. Please read this manual thoroughly before operating the machine in order to
familiarize yourself with its capabilities, and to make the most of its many functions. After
reading this manual, store it in a safe place for future reference.
How to Use This Manual
Symbols Used in This Manual
The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions,
handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.
WARNING
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may
lead to death or injury to persons if not performed
correctly. In order to use the machine safely, always
pay attention to these warnings.
CAUTION
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may
lead to injury to persons, or damage to property if not
performed correctly. In order to use the machine
safely, always pay attention to these cautions.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to
read these items carefully in order to operate the machine
correctly, and to avoid damage to the machine.
Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional
explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is highly
recommended.
Keys Used in This Manual
The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be
pressed are expressed in this manual:
• Control Panel Keys .................. <Key icon> + (Key Name)
Examples:
(Start)
(Stop)
• Touch
Panel Display Keys ....... [Key Name]
Examples: [Cancel]
[Done]
How to Use This Manual
xi
Displays Used in This Manual
Screen shots of the touch panel display used in this manual are those taken when
the optional Saddle Finisher-F2 and Puncher Unit-B1 are attached to the
imageRUNNER 5020i.
Note that functions that cannot be used depending on the model or options, are not
displayed on the touch panel display.
The keys which you should press are marked with a
, as shown below.
When multiple keys can be pressed on the touch panel display, all keys are marked.
Select the keys which suit your needs.
Place your originals
press [Special Features].
Press this key for operation.
Illustrations Used in This Manual
Illustrations used in this manual are those displayed when the optional Saddle
Finisher-F2 is attached to the imageRUNNER 5020i.
xii
How to Use This Manual
Legal Notices
FCC (Federal Communications Commission)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
Operator’s Manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his
own expense.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise
specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you
could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
Laser Safety
This product complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as a Class Ι laser
product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS)
Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and
Safety Act of 1968. Class Ι levels of laser radiation are not considered to be
hazardous.
Since radiation emitted inside the product is completely confined within protective
housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine
during any phase of user operation. Do not remove protective housings or external
covers, except as directed by the equipment’s Reference Guide.
Legal Notices
xiii
CDRH Regulations
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug
Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976.
These regulations apply to laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976.
Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The label
shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be
attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
CANON INC.
3-30-2 SHIMOMARUKO, OHTA-KU, TOKYO, JAPAN
MANUFACTURED:
THIS PRODUCT CONFORMS WITH DHHS RADIATION
PERFORMANCE STANDARD, 21 CFR CHAPTER 1 SUBCHAPTER J.
The labels shown below are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine.
DANGER- Invisible laser radiation when opening the cover,
DANGER- Invisible laser radiation when open.
removing developing assembly, or cartridges.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
CAUTION-INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.
CAUTION-INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPENING
ATTENTION
VORSICHT
ATTENZIONE
PRECAUCIÓN
VARO!
VARNING!
ADVARSEL!
ADVARSEL
THE COVER, REMOVING DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY.
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
- RAYONNEMENT LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS D’OUVERTURE DU COUVERCLE.
DU DÉMONTAGE DE L’ENSEMBLE DE DÉVELOPPEMENT.
EVITER TOUTE EXPOSITION DIRECTE AVEC LE FAISCEAU.
- UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET.
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
- EMISSIONE DI UN RAGGIO LASER INVISIBILE A SEGUITO DELL’ APERTURA
DELLA COPERTURA O DELLA RIMOZIONE DEL GRUPPO DI SVILUPPO.
EVITARE L’ESPOSIZIONE DIRETTA AL RAGGIO LASER.
- RADIACIÓN LÁSER INVISIBLE EN CASO DE ABRIR LA CUBIERTA Y RETIRAR
LA UNIDAD REVELADORA. EVITE LA EXPOSICIÓN AL HAZ LÁSER.
- AVATTAESSA KEHITYSYKSIKÖN POISSAOLLESSA OLET ALTTINA
NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.
- OSYNLIG LASERSTRÄLNING NÄR DENNA DELÄR ÖPPNAD OCH.
FRAMKALLAREN ÄRURTAGEN. BETRAKTA EJ STRÄLEN.
- USYNLIG LASER STRÅLING, NÅR DÆKSLET ÅBNES FOR AT FJERNE
FRAMKALLALDEREN. UNDGÅAT BLIVE RAMT AFSTRÅLEN.
- USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSELEÍ ÅPNES OG.
LASERENHETEN TASUT. IKKE SE DIREKTE PÅ STRÅLEN.
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
ATTENTION - RAYONNEMENT LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS D’OUVERTURE.
VORSICHT
ATTENZIONE
PRECAUCION
VARO!
VARNING!
ADVARSEL!
ADVARSEL
EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU.
- UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET.
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
- RADIAZIONE LASER INVISIBLE IN CASO DI APERTURA.
EVITARE L’ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO.
- RADIACION LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE.
EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO.
- AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE
LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.
- OSYNLIG LASERSTRÄLNING NAR DENNA DELÄR ÖPPNAD.
BETRAKTA EJ STRÄLEN.
- USYNLIG LASER STRÅLING, NÅR DENNE ER ÅBEN.
UNDGÅ BESTRÅLING.
- USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES.
UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN.
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those
specified in the manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
xiv
Legal Notices
International Energy Star Program
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Canon USA, Inc. has
determined that this machine meets the ENERGY STAR®
Program for energy efficiency.
The International ENERGY STAR® Office Equipment Program is
an international program that promotes energy saving through
the use of computers and other office equipment. The program
backs the development and dissemination of products with
functions that effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an
open system in which business proprietors can participate
voluntarily. The targeted products are office equipment, such as
computers, displays, printers, facsimiles, and copiers. The
standards and logos are uniform among participating nations.
Trademarks
Canon, the Canon logo, imageRUNNER, NetSpot Accountant, MEAP and MEAP logo are
trademarks of Canon Inc.
Acrobat is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, Java, Java 2 Platform Micro Edition (J2ME), Java 2 Platform,
Standard Edition (J2SETM) and JDK are trademarks of registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other regions. The Sun logo is a trademark of the U.S.
firm Sun Microsystems, Inc.
NetWare and Novell are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. IPX/SPX and NDS are
trademarks of Novell, Inc. Copyright 1996 Novel Inc. All rights reserved.
UNIX is a registered trademark exclusively licensed to X/Open Company, Ltd. in the United
States and/or in other countries.
Active Directory and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or in other countries.
Other product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their respective
owners.
Legal Notices
xv
Copyright
Copyright 2003 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, or by any
information storage or retrieval system without the prior written permission of
Canon Inc.
Disclaimers
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS
MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO
MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE OF USE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT. CANON
INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES
RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
xvi
Legal Notices
Important Safety Instructions
Please read these “Important Safety Instructions” thoroughly before operating the
machine. As these instructions are intended to prevent injury to the user or other
persons or destruction of property, always pay attention to these instructions. Also,
since it may result in unexpected accidents or injuries, do not perform any operation
unless otherwise specified in the manual. Improper operation or use of this
machine could result in personal injury and/or damage requiring extensive repair
that may not be covered under your Limited Warranty.
Installation
WARNING
• Do not install the machine near alcohol, paint thinner, or other flammable substances.
If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, it
may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not place the following items on the machine. If these items come into contact
with a high-voltage area inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
If these items are dropped or spilled inside the machine, immediately turn OFF the
main power switch, and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Then,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
- Necklaces and other metal objects
- Cups, vases, flowerpots, and other containers filled with water or liquids
Important Safety Instructions
xvii
CAUTION
• Do not install the machine in unstable locations, such as on unsteady platforms or on
inclined floors, or in locations subject to excessive vibrations, as this may cause the
machine to fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury.
• Never block the ventilation slots and louvers on the machine. These openings are
provided for proper ventilation of working parts inside the machine. Blocking these
openings can cause the machine to overheat. Never place the machine on a soft
surface, such as a sofa or rug.
• Do not install the machine in the following locations.
- A damp or dusty location
- A location near a water faucet or water
- A location exposed to direct sunlight
- A location subject to high temperatures
- A location near open flames
• Do not remove the machine’s leveling feet after the machine has been installed, as
this may cause the machine to fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury.
xviii
Important Safety Instructions
Power Supply
WARNING
• Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also, do not place heavy objects on the
power cord, or pull on or excessively bend it, as this could cause electrical damage,
resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
• Keep the power cord away from a heat source; failure to do this, may cause the cord
coating to melt, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may result in
electrical shock.
• Do not connect the power cord a multiplug power strip, as this may cause a fire or
electrical shock.
• Do not bundle up or tie the power cord in a knot, as this may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Insert the power plug completely into the power outlet, as failure to do so may result
in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not use power cords other than the power cord provided, as this may result in a
fire or electrical shock.
• As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an extension cord may result in
a fire or electrical shock. If an extension cord must be used, however, use one rated
for voltages of 120 V AC and over, untie the cord binding, and insert the power plug
completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the
power cord and the extension cord.
CAUTION
• Do not use power supplies with voltages other than those specified herein, as this
may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Always grasp the power plug when disconnecting the power cord. Pulling on the
power cord may expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. If
the power cord is damaged, this could cause current to leak, resulting in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged easily. If
objects are placed around the power plug, you will be unable to unplug it in an
emergency.
Important Safety Instructions
xix
Handling
WARNING
• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the machine. There are high-temperature
and high-voltage components inside the machine which may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• If the machine makes strange noises, or gives off smoke, heat, or strange smells,
immediately turn OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Then, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. Continued use of the
machine in this condition may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not use highly flammable sprays near the machine. If gas from these sprays
comes into contact with the electrical components inside the machine, it may result
in a fire or electrical shock.
• To avoid damage to the power cord and creating a fire hazard, always turn OFF the
main power switch, and unplug the interface cable when moving the machine.
Otherwise, the power cord or interface cable may be damaged, resulting in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Do not drop paper clips, staples, or other metal objects inside the machine. Also, do
not spill water, liquids, or flammable substances (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner,
etc.) inside the machine. If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area
inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock. If these items are
dropped or spilled inside the machine, immediately turn OFF the main power switch,
and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Then, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer.
CAUTION
• Do not place heavy objects on the machine, as they may tip over or fall resulting in
personal injury.
• Close the feeder/platen glass cover gently to avoid catching your hands, as this may
result in personal injury.
• Do not press down hard on the feeder/platen glass cover when using the platen glass
to make copies of thick books. Doing so may damage the platen glass and result in
personal injury.
• Do not touch the finisher while the machine is printing, as this may result in personal
injury.
xx
Important Safety Instructions
• Turn OFF the control panel power switch for safety when the machine will not be used
for a long period of time, such as overnight. Also, turn OFF the main power switch,
and disconnect the power cord for safety when the machine will not be used for an
extended period of time, such as during consecutive holidays.
• Do not place your hand in the part of the tray where stapling is performed when a
finisher is attached, as this may result in personal injury.
Important Safety Instructions
xxi
• The laser beam can be harmful to human bodies. Since radiation emitted inside the
product is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the
laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.
Read the following remarks and following instructions for safety.
• Never open covers other than those instructed in this manual.
• Do not remove the caution label attached to the cover of the laser scanner unit.
DANGER- Laser radiation when open.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
DANGER- Laser radiation when open.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
DANGER- Laser radiation when open
and interlock defeated.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE
TO BEAM.
DANGER- Laser radiation when open.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
• If the laser beam escapes from the machine, exposure may cause serious damage to
your eyes.
xxii
Important Safety Instructions
Maintenance and Inspections
WARNING
• When cleaning the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch, then disconnect
the power cord. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly, and clean the area around
the base of the power plug’s metal pins and the power outlet with a dry cloth to
ensure that all dust and grime is removed. If the power cord is connected for a long
period of time in a damp, dusty, or smoky location, dust can build up around the
power plug and become damp. This may cause a short circuit and result in a fire.
• Clean the machine using a slightly dampened cloth with a mild detergent mixed with
water. Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other flammable substances.
Check detergent for flammability prior to use. If flammable substances come into
contact with a high-voltage area inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
• There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages. When
removing jammed paper, or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow
necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as
this may result in burns or electrical shock.
• Do not burn or throw used toner bottles into open flames, as this may cause the toner
remaining inside the bottles to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
CAUTION
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during use.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not
touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as doing so may result in burns or
electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper or replacing the toner bottle, take care not to allow the
toner to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands
or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing
them with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner
stains.
Important Safety Instructions
xxiii
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the
jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting
into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them
immediately with cold water and consult a physician.
• When loading paper or removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your
hands on the edges of the originals or paper.
• When removing a used toner bottle, remove the bottle carefully to prevent the toner
from scattering and getting in your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets in your eyes or
mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
Consumables
WARNING
• Do not burn or throw used toner bottles into open flames, as this may cause the toner
remaining inside the bottles to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
• Do not store toner bottles or copy paper in places exposed to open flames, as this
may cause the toner or paper to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
• When discarding used toner bottles, put the bottles in a bag to prevent the toner
remaining inside the bottles from scattering, and dispose of them in a location away
from open flames.
CAUTION
Keep toner and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If these items
are ingested, consult a physician immediately.
Other Warnings
WARNING
For cardiac pacemaker users:
This product generates a low level magnetic field. If you use a cardiac pacemaker
and feel abnormalities, please move away from the product and consult your doctor.
xxiv
Important Safety Instructions
Periodic Inspection of the Breaker
This machine has a breaker that detects excess current or leakage current. Be sure
to test the breaker once or twice a month using the following procedure.
IMPORTANT
• Make sure that the main power is turned ON, and the machine is neither printing nor
scanning before inspecting the breaker.
• If a malfunction occurs after a periodic inspection, contact your local authorized Canon
dealer.
1
Push the test button with the tip of a ball-point pen, or similar
object.
NOTE
The breaker is located on the bottom left side of the machine, near the power cord.
Periodic Inspection of the Breaker
xxv
2
The breaker lever automatically switches to the OFF (“
side) position. Confirm that the power is cut OFF.
”
IMPORTANT
• Do not use the test button to turn the power ON and OFF.
• If the breaker lever does not switch to the OFF (“ ” side) position, repeat step 1.
• If the breaker lever does not switch to the OFF (“ ” side) position despite carrying
out the above procedure two or three times, contact your local authorized Canon
dealer.
3
xxvi
Once you have confirmed that the power is OFF, press the
main power switch to OFF (“ ” side).
Periodic Inspection of the Breaker
4
Move the breaker lever to the ON (“I” side) position.
5
Press the main power switch to ON (“I” side).
6
Fill in the check sheet, at the end of this manual, to document your
periodic inspections of the breaker.
Periodic Inspection of the Breaker
xxvii
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product
and the Use of Images
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and
the use of such images as scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your
product, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability. A
non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to be
a guide only. If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan,
print or otherwise reproduce any particular document, and/or of the use of the
images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should consult in advance
with your legal advisor for guidance.
xxviii
•
Paper Money
•
Travelers Checks
•
Money Orders
•
Food Stamps
•
Certificates of Deposit
•
Passports
•
Postage Stamps
(canceled or uncanceled)
•
Immigration Papers
•
Identifying Badges or Insignias
•
Internal Revenue Stamps
(canceled or uncanceled)
•
Selective Service or Draft Papers
•
Bonds or Other Certificates of
Indebtedness
•
Checks or Drafts Issued by
Governmental Agencies
•
Stock Certificates
•
Motor Vehicle Licenses and
Certificates of Title
•
Copyrighted Works/Works of Art
without Permission of Copyright
Owner
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images
Operations and Terms Used in This Manual
This machine makes effective use of memory in order to perform print operations
efficiently. For example, as soon as the machine has scanned the original that you
want to copy, it can immediately scan the next person’s original. You can also print
from this machine using a function other than the Copy function. In this machine,
these operations take place in a complex way so that not only copies, but also
various kinds of prints may sometimes have to wait their turn before they can be
output.
To avoid confusion when reading this manual, the terms “scanning,” “printing,” and
“copying” used throughout this manual are defined below. There are some cases in
which the scanning of an original when making a copy, and the process of making a
print, are described separately.
Scanning
Scanning an original to be copied or
sent, or scanning an original to be
stored as data in an inbox.
Printing
Outputting a copy, outputting data stored in an inbox,
or outputting data sent from a personal computer to the machine.
Operations and Terms Used in This Manual
xxix
Copying
Printing data scanned from an original,
followed by finishing (stapling, hole
punching, etc.).
xxx
Operations and Terms Used in This Manual
Before You Start Using
This Machine
1
CHAPTER
This chapter describes what you should know before using this machine, such as the
machine’s main features, parts and their functions, and how to turn ON the main power.
Installation Location and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
What This Machine Can Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
Switching the Functions Indicated on the Touch Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
New Functions Can Be Added. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Setting Specifications to Suit Your Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Functions That Conserve Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Checking, Changing, and Canceling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Displaying a Guide Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Reading Messages from the System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Other Useful Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Parts and Their Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
External View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Internal View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Control Panel Parts and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Checking the Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Checking Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30
Main Power and Control Panel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32
How to Turn ON the Main Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32
Control Panel Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39
Using the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40
Frequently Used Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40
Touch Panel Key Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41
Adjusting the Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43
Entering Alphabet Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43
Entering Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-45
Entering Values in Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47
Entering the Department ID and Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-48
1-1
1. Before You Start Using This Machine
Operations after Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
Operations after Using Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Logging in through the Authentication Screens of SDL and SSO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51
1
Placing Originals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55
Before You Start Using This Machine
Orientation of Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
Placing an Original on the Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Placing Originals in the Feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-63
Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
Multifunctional Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-74
Available Paper Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-75
1-2
Installation Location and Handling
This section describes precautions for installation location and handling. We
recommend that you read this section prior to using this machine.
Installation Precautions
Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations
■ Avoid locations subject to extremes of temperature and humidity, whether
low or high.
For example, avoid installing the machine near water faucets, hot water heaters,
humidifiers, air conditioners, heaters, or stoves.
■ Avoid installing the machine in direct sunlight.
If this is unavoidable, shade the machine using curtains. Be sure that the curtains do not
block the machine’s ventilation slots or louvers, or interfere with the electrical cord or
power supply.
Installation Location and Handling
1-3
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
During use, this machine generates a slight amount of ozone. Although sensitivity to
ozone may vary, this amount is not harmful. Nevertheless, if the machine is used for a
prolonged period of time in a poorly ventilated room, or when making a large quantity of
prints, be sure to ventilate the room to make the working environment as comfortable as
possible.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ Avoid locations where a considerable amount of dust accumulates.
■ Avoid locations where ammonia gas is emitted.
■ Avoid locations near volatile or flammable materials, such as alcohol or
paint thinner.
■ Avoid locations which are subject to vibration.
For example, avoid installing the machine on unstable floors or stands.
1-4
Installation Location and Handling
■ Avoid exposing the machine to rapid changes in temperature.
If the room in which the machine is installed is rapidly heated from a low temperature,
condensation may form inside the machine. This can adversely affect print quality or result
in an inability to obtain print images.
■ Avoid installing the machine near computers or other precision electronic
equipment.
Electrical interference and vibrations generated by the machine during printing can
adversely affect the operation of such equipment.
■ Avoid installing the machine near televisions, radios, or other similar
electronic equipment.
The machine might interfere with sound and picture signal reception. Insert the power
plug into a dedicated power outlet, and maintain as much space as possible between the
machine and other electronic equipment.
■ Do not remove the machine’s leveling feet.
Do not remove the machine’s leveling feet after the machine has been installed.
If you put weight on the front of the machine while the paper drawers or units within the
machine are pulled out, the machine may fall forward. To prevent this from happening,
make sure that the machine’s leveling feet are in place.
Installation Location and Handling
1-5
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
Select a Safe Power Supply
■ Plug the machine into a 120 V AC outlet.
■ Do not connect other electrical equipment to the same power outlet to
which the machine is connected.
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
■ Do not connect the power cord into a multiplug power strip, as this may
cause a fire or electrical shock.
■ The power cord may become damaged if it is often stepped on or if heavy
objects are placed on it. Continued use of a damaged power cord can lead
to an accident, such as a fire or electrical shock.
Provide Adequate Installation Space
■ Provide enough space on each side of the machine for unrestricted
operation.
When the optional Paper Deck-G1,
When the optional Copy Tray-C3 is
Saddle Finisher-F2, and Puncher Unit-B1 attached.
are attached. (Each option in an
extended condition)
1-6
Installation Location and Handling
29 1/4" (743 mm)
49" (1,244 mm)
29 1/4" (743 mm)
85 3/8" (2,167 mm)
52 5/8" (1,335 mm)
49" (1,244 mm)
more than 2 3/8" (60 mm)
more than 2 3/8" (60 mm)
Moving the Machine
■ If you intend to move the machine, contact your local authorized Canon
dealer beforehand.
Handling Precautions
■ Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the machine.
■ Some parts inside the machine are subject to high-voltages and
temperatures. Take adequate precaution when inspecting the inside of the
machine. Do not carry out any inspections not described in this manual.
■ Be careful not to spill liquid or drop any foreign objects, such as paper
clips or staples inside the machine. If a foreign object comes into contact
with electrical parts inside the machine, it might cause a short circuit and
result in a fire or electrical shock.
Installation Location and Handling
1-7
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ If there is smoke or unusual noise, immediately turn the main power switch
OFF, disconnect the power cord from the power outlet, and call your local
authorized Canon dealer. Using the machine in this state may cause a fire
or electrical shock. Also, avoid placing objects around the power plug so
that the machine can be disconnected whenever necessary.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ Do not turn the main power switch OFF or open the front cover while the
machine is in operation. This might result in paper jams.
■ For safety reasons, turn OFF the control panel power switch of the
machine when it will not be used for a prolonged period of time, such as
overnight.
■ It is recommended that you do not store data on the hard disk of this
machine, without first backing up copies on a computer or printing out
such data. This is necessary to avoid the possible loss of data, in case the
machine or its hard disk is damaged.
■ In the center of the front cover is the ventilation port. Do not block this port
by pasting a sheet of paper over it, for example.
CAUTION
CANON RECOMMENDS THAT DATA STORED ON THE PRODUCT’S HARD DISK
DRIVE BE DUPLICATED OR BACKED UP TO PREVENT ITS LOSS IN THE EVENT
OF FAILURE OR OTHER MALFUNCTION OF THE HARD DISK DRIVE. NEITHER
CANON NOR ANY SERVICE PROVIDER WILL BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF DATA STORED ON THE PRODUCT’S HARD DISK DRIVE (SEE THE
TERMS OF THE PRODUCT’S LIMITED WARRANTY FOR MORE DETAILS).
1-8
Installation Location and Handling
What This Machine Can Do
IMPORTANT
The Send function is only available on the imageRUNNER 6020i/5020i.
Switching the Functions Indicated on the Touch Panel
Display
After the power is turned ON, the following screen appears on the touch panel
display. You can press [Copy], [Send], [Mail Box], [Scan], or [System Monitor] to
change functions. (See “Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON,” on p. 3-8.)
To display other functions, such as a MEAP application if it is installed, press [➞].
IMPORTANT
[Scan] is displayed when the Network Scan feature is installed.
NOTE
• [Send] is only displayed on the imageRUNNER 6020i/5020i.
• You can set the initial screen (the first screen shown when the machine is turned ON)
from the Additional Functions screen. The initial screen can be the Copy, Send, Mail Box,
MEAP, or System Monitor screen.
• If you press [➞] right after the machine is activated, the screen will not be changed. Wait
for a moment, then press [➞] again.
What This Machine Can Do
1-9
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
Most operations for using this machine are done from the touch panel display. By
pressing the keys following the messages on the touch panel display, you can
utilize the functions of this machine.
Send
Mail Box
Press to use the Send function. (See
Chapter 1, “Various Sending Methods,” in
the Sending Guide.)
Press to use the Mail Box function. (See Chapter
1, “Introduction to the Mail Box Function,” in the
Mail Box Guide.)
Scan
Copy
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
Press to use the Network
Scan function.
Press to use the
Copy function.
(See Chapter 1,
“Basic Copying,” in
the Copying
Guide.)
Job/Print Monitor Area
Displays the current status of the copy job
or other functions.
Press to use other functions,
such as a MEAP application
if it is installed.
System Monitor
Press to change, check, or cancel a job, or to print a job log.
(See Chapter 2, “Checking Job and Device Status.”)
New Functions Can Be Added
This machine is compliant with MEAP (Multifunctional Embedded Application
Platform). MEAP is a system that enables you to install Java applications using an
embedded Java platform. MEAP enables you to do the following.
■ Installing/Uninstalling the Application
By installing MEAP compliant applications, you can utilize new functions. You can also
uninstall the application.
NOTE
For instructions on how to install and uninstall MEAP compliant applications, see the
MEAP SMS Administrator Guide.
■ License Management
Whenever a MEAP application is installed, a license is issued. For each application, you
can set the terms of validity and impression limits for Scan, Print, or Copy jobs.
NOTE
For details on obtaining licenses, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
1-10
What This Machine Can Do
■ User Management and Restriction Using a Login Service
IMPORTANT
To use SSO, it is necessary to install a Security Agent on a DNS server. Security Agent is
supplied on the accompanying CD-ROM. For information on how to install Security
Agent, refer to the Read Me.txt file on the CD-ROM.
What This Machine Can Do
1-11
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
This mode enables you to restrict anyone who does not enter the correct password from
using the machine. User authentication enables you to take statistics on the usage of the
machine. User identification is executed using a login service. The following three login
services can be used with this machine:
• Default Authentication (Departement ID Management)
Select this login service if you are using the Department ID Management or not setting
any user authentication function. If Department ID Management (from the Additional
Functions screen of the imageRUNNER) is set to ‘On’, you can configure the machine
so that it can only be used after the department ID and password have been entered.
• SDL (Simple Device Login)
A login service that you can use with one machine only. You can register user data in
the memory of the machine from a web browser. In addition, it enables you to manage
user data by linking to the Department ID Management function of the machine.
• SSO (Single Sign-On)
A login service that is linked to the domain controller on a network in an Active
Directory environment, and performs authentication for connecting to the network
domain while logging in to a machine.
Setting Specifications to Suit Your Needs
By pressing (Additional Functions), the Additional Functions screen appears.
The Additional Functions screen enables you to make common settings related to
many functions of the machine, as well as customize specific functions to suit your
needs. For details on settings not explained in this manual, see the following
manuals:
1
• Copy
Before You Start Using This Machine
Settings ................................................................ Copying Guide
• Communications Settings, Address Book Settings ....... Sending Guide
• Mail Box Settings........................................................... Mail Box Guide
• Printer Settings.............................................................. PS/PCL Printer Guide
• Network Settings ........................................................... Network Guide
Additional Functions Screen
System Settings Screen
1-12
What This Machine Can Do
Functions That Conserve Power
You can conserve power efficiently using the following modes when the machine is
not being used.
NOTE
• After the machine wakes up from being in one of these modes, there will be a slight delay
in starting to use the machine.
• The touch panel display turns OFF when the machine enters one of these modes.
• You can continue to print data sent from a computer when the machine enters one of
these modes.
■ Energy Saver Mode
When the machine will not be used for a prolonged period of time, press
(Energy
Saver) to put the machine into the Energy Saver mode. This reduces the temperature of
the machine’s fixing unit, and thereby conserves energy. To start operations again,
press
(Energy Saver) once more. Pressing the control panel power switch also
reactivates the machine.
NOTE
The following Energy Saver mode settings can be selected: ‘–10%’, ‘–25%’, ‘–50%’, and
‘None’. (See “Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting,” on p. 3-19.)
What This Machine Can Do
1-13
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
NOTE
• Settings made from the Additional Functions screen are not changed even if you
press
(Reset).
• For instructions on how to customize settings, see Chapter 3, “Customizing Settings.”
• For instructions on how to specify the System Settings, see Chapter 4, “System Manager
Settings.”
• [Communications Settings], [Address Book Settings], [Forwarding Settings], and
[Manage/Access to Address Book] are not displayed on the imageRUNNER 6020/5020.
• [Printer Settings] is displayed only if the Network Multi-PDL Printer Kit is attached.
• [Network Settings], [Remote UI], and [Clear Message Board] are displayed only if the
Network Kit is attached.
• [Report Settings] is displayed only if the Network Kit or Network Multi-PDL Printer Kit is
attached.
• For instructions on how to specify the Printer Settings, see the PS/PCL Printer Guide.
• For instructions on how to specify the Network Settings, see the Network Guide.
• [Auto Online/Offline] is only displayed if the Network Scan Function is attached.
■ Low-Power Mode
If the machine is not used (no keys are pressed) for a period of about 15 minutes after
prints have been made or a key operation is performed, the machine automatically enters
the Low-Power mode.
The Low-Power mode reduces the temperature of the machine’s fixing unit and thereby
conserves energy. This function meets the ENERGY STAR® Program for energy
efficiency. To start operations again, press
(Energy Saver). Pressing the control panel
power switch also reactivates the machine.
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
NOTE
The Low-Power Mode Time can be set from 10 minutes to 4 hours. (See “Setting the
Low-Power Mode Time,” on p. 3-58.)
■ Sleep Mode
The Sleep mode reduces power consumption even more than the Energy Saver mode
and the Low-Power mode. You can set the machine to enter the Sleep mode whenever
you desire by pressing the control panel power switch. To reactivate the machine, press
the control panel power switch.
NOTE
• Turn the control panel power switch OFF when not using your machine for a prolonged
period of time, for example, at night.
• The machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely depending on the status of the
installed MEAP applications.
• The time it takes for the machine to automatically enter the Sleep mode can be set from
10 minutes to 4 hours. (See “Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing
Operations,” on p. 3-52.)
■ Quiet Mode
If the machine is not used (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time after prints
have been made or a key operation is performed, the device sounds from the machine are
stopped, and the machine enters the Quiet mode.
NOTE
The Quiet mode settings can be set from 0 to 9 minutes, in one minute increments. (See
“Setting the Time for the Unit to Quiet Down after the Last Task,” on p. 3-55.)
1-14
What This Machine Can Do
■ Daily Timer
The machine automatically enters the Sleep mode at the specified time and day of the
week set with the daily timer. To reactivate the machine, press the control panel power
switch.
You can set the Energy Saver mode whenever desired by pressing
(Energy Saver) during this period.
Energy Saver mode
Low-Power mode
Low-Power mode
Auto Sleep mode
Operation done
Sleep mode
15 minutes
One hour
What This Machine Can Do
Time
1-15
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
NOTE
• The Daily Timer settings are from Sunday to Saturday and 00:00 to 23:59. (See “Setting
the Time for the Unit’s Power to Turn OFF on Different Days of the Week,” on p. 3-57.)
• Precedence of Power Consumption Functions:
- You can set the machine to enter the Energy Saver mode when the machine is neither
in the Low-Power mode nor the Sleep mode.
- If the machine is not operated for a period of about 15 minutes while the machine is in
the Energy Saver mode, the machine automatically enters the Low-Power mode.
- If the machine is not operated for a period of about one hour when the machine is in the
Low-Power mode, or at the time and day of the week set with the Daily Timer, the
machine automatically enters the Sleep mode.
- If the time set for the Auto Sleep mode to take place is shorter than that of the LowPower mode, the Auto Sleep mode has priority. (The machine enters the Sleep mode.)
- Even when the machine is in the Low-Power mode, the Daily Timer settings are
performed at the specified time and day of the week set with the Daily Timer. (The
machine enters the Sleep mode.)
- Even before the time set for the machine to enter the Sleep mode, the Daily Timer
settings are performed at the specified time and day of the week set with the Daily
Timer. (The machine enters the Sleep mode.)
• The default settings are as follows:
- Low-power mode: 15 minutes
- Sleep mode: one hour
- Daily Timer: no setting
Checking, Changing, and Canceling Jobs
By using the System Monitor screen, you can check the status of a printing
document, cancel printing, or specify the printing priority.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
The System Monitor Screen (Device)
The System Monitor Screen (Print)
NOTE
• For a description of functions, see Chapter 2, “Checking Job and Device Status.”
• The status of each icon displayed on the screen is as follows:
Icon
(Type of Job)
Description
Copy job
Error
Send job
Paper jam
Staple jam
Printer job
Add toner
Report job
Network Scan job
Additional Functions’ job
What This Machine Can Do
Description
Mail Box job
Remote copy job
1-16
Icon
(Machine Status)
Displaying a Guide Screen
Pressing ? (Guide) brings up a guide screen with information about the various
features that are available with your machine.
■ Usage Guide
Guide Function Screen
Pressing ? (Guide) after selecting a function brings up a guide screen with an
explanation of that function. Use this guide function if you do not understand how to use
the mode you are setting.
In this example, the Margin mode has been selected. If you press ? (Guide) after
pressing [Special Features] ➞ [Margin], the touch panel display changes to the Guide
Function screen, as shown above. Press [Done] to return to the Various Originals Menu
screen. To return the display to the Guide Menu screen, press [Guide Menu].
What This Machine Can Do
1-17
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ Guide Menu
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
Guide Menu Screen
To find the right mode for your particular needs or to find a simple description of a mode,
press ? (Guide) while the Basic Features screen or Special Features screen is
displayed. The Guide Menu screen appears on the touch panel display, as shown above.
For example, if you are copying photo originals:
Press [Making Copies] ➞ [Various originals] ➞ [Photo original] or [Originals with Text/
Photo] ➞ press [▼] or [▲] to read the detailed information. Press [Done] to return to the
Various Originals screen. To return the display to the Guide Menu screen, press [Done].
Reading Messages from the System Manager
A message board is used to indicate messages on the touch panel display from the
System Manager to users of this machine through the Remote UI feature. (See
Chapter 2, “Remote UI Functions,” in the Remote UI Guide.)
NOTE
• The message board can only be used if the machine is connected to a network.
• For instructions on how to erase the message board, see “Erasing a Message Board
(Clear Message Board),” on p. 4-88.
1-18
What This Machine Can Do
Types of Message Boards
The following three types of message boards are available:
■ A Message Board without [Done]:
■ A Message Board with [Done]:
If you press [Done] and close the message board, you can perform normal operations.
The message appears again when the main power is turned back ON, or after Auto Clear
has taken place. You can set the Auto Clear Time from 0 to 9 minutes, in one minute
increments. You can also cancel this function. (See “Setting the Time for the Display to
Return to the Basic Features Screen after Finishing Operations,” on p. 3-54.)
What This Machine Can Do
1-19
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ A Message Board Where the Message Appears in the Job/Print Monitor
Area:
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
Job/Print Monitor Area
Other Useful Functions
The following explains other useful functions:
■ Auto Drawer Switching Function
If a paper drawer runs out of paper during printing, the machine automatically locates
another paper drawer loaded with the same size paper, and begins feeding paper from
that paper drawer.
NOTE
You can set whether a paper drawer is subject to Auto Drawer Switching for each
function. (See “Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching,”
on p. 3-14.)
■ Auto Clear Function
If the machine is not operated for a period of about two minutes after prints have been
made or a key operation is performed, the machine automatically restores the standard
settings.
NOTE
You can set the Auto Clear Time from 0 to 9 minutes, in one minute increments. The
default setting is ‘2 minutes’. (See “Setting the Time for the Display to Return to the Basic
Features Screen after Finishing Operations,” on p. 3-54.)
■ Job Duration Display Function
If you set Job Duration Display to ‘On’ from the Additional Functions screen, the display
shows the copy waiting time depending on the selected copy mode.
NOTE
The job duration time is not displayed for the Remote or Cascade Copy, Transparency
Interleaving, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Different Size Originals, Rotate Collating, and Rotate
Grouping modes, or when the copy waiting time is less than one minute. (See Chapter 3,
“Customizing Settings,” in the Copying Guide.)
1-20
What This Machine Can Do
■ Paper Supply Indicator Function
This function shows the remaining amount of paper in each paper drawer when you select
the paper source (See Chapter 1, “Basic Copying,” in the Copying Guide or Chapter 4,
“Using/Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox,” in the Mail Box Guide), or when paper in
one paper drawer has run out during printing.
Display When Selecting Paper
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
Paper Supply Indicator
Display When Paper Has Run Out
There are four different indicators as shown below:
Display
Remaining Paper
Paper drawer is approximately 50% - 100% full.
Paper drawer is approximately 10% - 50% full.
Paper drawer is less than approximately 10% full.
Paper drawer is empty.
■ Paper Output
When scanning and printing one original, and when printing on free size paper or other
available paper stock that is set in the stack bypass, the paper is output as face up. In
other cases, paper is output face down in page order. For details about the available
paper stock, see “Available Paper Stock,” on p. 1-75.
What This Machine Can Do
1-21
Parts and Their Functions
This section provides you with the names and functions of the parts on the outside
and inside of the main unit, control panel, and touch panel display. An illustration of
the machine with some of the optional equipment attached is also provided to show
you the copier model. For more information on optional equipment, parts and their
functions, see Chapter 7, “Optional Equipment.”
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
External View
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1-22
Parts and Their Functions
Includes the keys, touch panel display, and
indicators required for operating the machine.
(See “Control Panel Parts and Functions,” on p.
1-26.)
b Original Supply Tray
Originals placed here are automatically fed sheet
by sheet to the platen glass. Place originals into
this tray with the surface you want to copy face
up.
c Feeder
Originals placed in the feeder are automatically
fed sheet by sheet onto the platen glass for
copying. The feeder also automatically turns over
two-sided originals to make two-sided copies.
d Original Output Area
Originals that have been scanned from the
original supply tray are output to the Original
Output Area in the order that they are fed into the
feeder.
e Stack Bypass
Feeds transparencies and nonstandard size
paper stock. (See “Making Prints Using the Stack
Bypass,” on p. 1-63.)
f Main Power Switch
Press to the “I” side to turn the power ON. (See
“Main Power and Control Panel Power,” on p.
1-32.)
g Right Cover
Open this cover when clearing a paper jam. (See
“Clearing Paper Jams,” on p. 6-2.)
h Paper Drawer 1, 2
Each paper drawer holds up to 1,500 sheets of
paper (20 lb bond (80 g/m2)).
i Paper Drawer 3, 4
Each paper drawer holds up to 550 sheets of
paper (20 lb bond (80 g/m2)). You can adjust
paper drawer 3 to hold the following standard
paper sizes: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, or
STMTR.
Parts and Their Functions
1-23
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
a Control Panel
Internal View
1
2
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
3
4
6
5
7
8
a Underside of the Platen Glass Cover
Holds originals in place on the platen glass.
b Platen Glass
Place originals, such as books, thick originals,
thin originals, and transparencies on the platen
glass for copying or scanning.
c Toner Supply Cover
Open this cover when supplying toner. (See
“Adding Toner,” on p. 5-12.)
d Front Cover
Open this cover when clearing a paper jam. (See
“Clearing Paper Jams,” on p. 6-2.)
1-24
Parts and Their Functions
e Unit 1 (Fixing Transport Unit)
Pull the Fixing Unit out to clear a paper jam that
has occurred on the left side of the machine.
f Unit 2 (Duplexing Transport Unit)
Pull the Transport Unit out to clear a paper jam
that has occurred on the right side of the machine.
g Breaker
Detects and prevents excess or leakage current.
(See “Periodic Inspection of the Breaker,” on p.
xxv.)
h Test Button
Press this button to periodically test the circuit breaker.
Feeder
1
2
5
4
3
a Feeder Cover
Open this cover to remove jammed originals.
b Original Supply Tray
Originals placed here are automatically fed sheet
by sheet to the platen glass. Place originals into
this tray with the surface that you want to copy
face up.
d Slide Guide
Adjust the slide guides to match the width of the
original.
e Original Set Indicator
Lights when originals are placed in the original
supply tray.
c Original Output Area
Originals that have been scanned from the
original supply tray are output to the Original
Output Area in the order that they are fed into the
feeder.
Parts and Their Functions
1-25
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
Control Panel Parts and Functions
1
2
Touch Panel Display
3
4
5
6
Energy Saver
Counter
Check
Display Contrast
ON / OFF
1
Reset
Before You Start Using This Machine
Guide
?
Additional Functions
16
15
14
13
12
a Counter Check key
Press to display the copy and print count total on
the touch panel display. (See “Checking the
Counter,” on p. 1-27.)
b Display Contrast Dial
Use to adjust the brightness of the touch panel
display. (See “Adjusting the Brightness,” on p. 1-42.)
c Numeric keys
Press to enter numerical values.
d Energy Saver key
Press to set or cancel in the Energy Saver mode.
e Control Panel Power Switch (Sub Power
Supply)
Press to turn the control panel ON or OFF. When
turned OFF, the machine is in the Sleep mode.
(See “Control Panel Power Switch,” on p. 1-38.)
f Stop key
Press to temporarily stop a scanning operation,
or an output operation of the Copy function.
g Start key
Press to start an operation.
h Main Power Indicator
Lights when the main power is turned ON.
i Clear key
Press to clear incorrectly entered values or
characters.
1-26
Parts and Their Functions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ID
0
C
Processing/Data
Error
11
10
Stop
Start
Clear
Power
9
8
7
j Error Indicator
Flashes or lights if there is an error in the
machine. When the indicator flashes, follow the
instructions appearing on the touch panel
display. When the Error indicator maintains a
steady red light, contact your local authorized
Canon dealer.
k Processing/Data Indicator
Flashes green when the machine is performing
operations, and maintains a steady green light
when a job is waiting or a document has been
received in memory.
l ID key
Press when setting or enabling Department ID
Management.
m Additional Functions key
Press to set additional functions.
n Guide key
Press to display explanations of modes or
functions on the touch panel display. (See
“Displaying a Guide Screen,” on p. 1-17.)
o Reset key
Press to return the settings to the Standard
mode.
p Clip Holder
Place paper clips here.
Checking the Counter
1
Press
(Counter Check) on the control panel.
Counter
Check
Display Contrast
The counter totals are shown on the touch panel display.
The machine’s serial number is displayed.
Checking the Counter
1-27
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
You can check the machine’s copy and print page counts.
You can also check print and scan page counts that are performed by the users
who enter through login services, for each application.
● To check the MEAP counter number:
❑ Press [MEAP Counter].
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
❑ Press the Application Name drop-down list ➞ select the desired application.
The Application ID and license expiration date are displayed.
If the counter for the desired application is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲].
To check the version information of an application, press [Version
Information].
1-28
Checking the Counter
The counter totals are shown on the touch panel display.
2
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
Press [Done].
The display returns to the Basic Features screen.
Checking the Counter
1-29
Checking Device Information
This function enables you to check the version of this machine and get information
about the options attached.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
1
Press
(Counter Check) on the control panel.
Counter
Check
2
Display Contrast
Press [Device Configuration].
The Device Configuration screen is displayed.
1-30
Checking Device Information
Check the device configuration settings.
1
The Device configuration screen is divided into multiple screens. Press [▼] or
[▲] to display the desired screen.
Checking Device Information
1-31
Before You Start Using This Machine
3
Main Power and Control Panel Power
The machine is provided with two power switches, a main power switch, a control
panel power switch, and a breaker that detects excess current or leakage current.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
How to Turn ON the Main Power
This section explains how to turn ON the main power.
1
Make sure that the power plug is firmly inserted into the
power outlet.
WARNING
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands as this may
result in electrical shock.
2
Press the power switch to ON (“I” side). The main power
switch is located on the right side of the machine.
The main power indicator on the control panel lights when the main power switch
is turned ON.
IMPORTANT
If the main power indicator on the control panel does not light even though the main
power switch is ON, be sure to check the breaker to see if it is OFF. (See “When the
Power Does Not Turn ON,” on p. 6-52.)
NOTE
When turning OFF the main power, press the main power switch to the “
1-32
Main Power and Control Panel Power
” side.
3
The screen shown below are displayed with the machine is
ready to scan.
● If login authentication by a login service is not set, and an application other than MEAP is selected as the initial function in Common
Settings from the Additional Functions screen:
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
❑ The Start Up screen is displayed until the machine is ready to scan.
If a message appears on the touch panel display, proceed to step 4.
❑ The screen below is displayed when the machine is ready to scan.
The machine is ready to print within six minutes for the imageRUNNER
6020i/6020 or five minutes for the imageRUNNER 5020i/5020 (at a room
temperature of 68°F) after the screen above appears.
Main Power and Control Panel Power
1-33
NOTE
• The Standard mode is set on the touch panel display.
• The standard copy settings are:
- Copy ratio: Direct (100%)
- Paper selection: Auto Paper Selection
- Copy exposure: Auto Exposure Control
- Copy quantity: 1
- Copy function: 1 ➞ 1-sided copy
• You can change the standard settings. (See Chapter 3, “Customizing Settings,” in
the Copying Guide, Chapter 5, “Customizing Settings,” in the Mail Box Guide, or
Chapter 3, “Setting/Storing the Communications Settings,” in the Sending Guide.)
• You can select which functions to display on the Basic Features screen when
turning ON the main power, according to the Additional Functions settings. (See
“Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON,” on p. 3-8.)
• When the machine becomes ready to scan, jobs can be reserved. (See Chapter 1,
“Basic Copying,” in the Copying Guide, Chapter 4, “Using/Arranging Documents
Stored in an Inbox,” in the Mail Box Guide, or Chapter 1, “Various Sending
Methods,” in the Sending Guide.)
• If you press [➞] right after the machine is activated, the screen will not change.
Wait for a moment, then press [➞] again.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
● If login authentication by a login service is not set, and MEAP is
selected as the initial function in Common Settings from the
Additional Functions screen:
❑ The Start Up screen is displayed until the machine is ready to scan.
1-34
Main Power and Control Panel Power
❑ After the Start Up screen disappears, the MEAP Start Up screen is displayed.
(The background color of the screen is changed to brown.)
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
You can press [➞] to switch to the Basic Features screen.
❑ The MEAP Basic Features screen is displayed.
● If login authentication by a login service is set:
❑ The Start Up screen is displayed until the machine is ready to scan.
Main Power and Control Panel Power
1-35
❑ The MEAP Start Up screen is displayed regardless of the Initial Function
settings. (The background color of the screen is changed to brown.)
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
IMPORTANT
• If you turn OFF the main power, wait at least ten seconds before turning the main
power back ON.
• It takes longer for the machine to become ready to print, if you scan originals while
the machine is warming up.
• If SSO or SDL is set as the login service, the machine will take longer to become
ready to scan.
4
If a message appears on the touch panel display, follow the
instructions.
● If the message <You must insert a control card.> appears:
❑ Insert a control card into the card slot.
The Basic Features screen is displayed.
NOTE
• If the optional Card Reader-C1 is not attached, this message will not appear.
• For instructions on using the optional Card Reader-C1, see “Card Reader-C1,” on
p. 7-47.
1-36
Main Power and Control Panel Power
● If the message <Enter the Dept. ID and Password using the numeric
keys.> appears:
❑ Press [Dept. ID] ➞ enter the Department ID using
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter the password using
❑ Press
ID
0
-
0
-
9
9
(numeric keys).
(numeric keys).
(ID).
The Basic Features screen is displayed.
NOTE
If the Department ID and password have not been set, this message will not
appear. For instructions on how to enter the Department ID and password, see
“Operations after Turning the Power ON,” on p. 1-48.
● If an authentication screen other than Department ID appears:
❑ Enter the user name and password ➞ press [Log In].
The SDL screen is used as an example above.
The Basic Features screen is displayed.
NOTE
For instructions on how to enter the user name and password on the MEAP
authentication screen, see “Logging in through the Authentication Screens of SDL
and SSO,” on p. 1-51.
Main Power and Control Panel Power
1-37
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
Control Panel Power Switch
Press the control panel power switch to cancel the Sleep mode and resume normal
machine operations.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
NOTE
The machine can receive and print documents from a personal computer even when it is
in the Sleep mode. I-fax documents can also be received while the machine is in the
Sleep mode.
1-38
Main Power and Control Panel Power
System Settings
It is necessary to set up the machine before using it on a network or as a printer.
■ Setting Up and Connecting the Machine to the Network:
See the Network Guide.
■ Installing the Printer Driver:
See the PS Driver Guide and the PCL Driver Guide.
■ Using the Send Function:
See the Sending Guide.
■ Date and Time Settings:
See “Setting the Current Date and Time,” on p. 3-48.
■ System Manager Settings:
See “Specifying the System Manager Settings (System Manager Settings),” on p. 4-3.
System Settings
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
To set up the machine, refer to the following guides or sections for instructions:
1-39
Using the Touch Panel Display
This section describes the keys that are frequently used on the touch panel display.
Information on how to adjust the brightness of the touch panel display is also
provided.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
CAUTION
Press the touch panel keys gently with your fingers. Do not press the touch
panel display with a pencil, ballpoint pen, or other sharp objects that can
scratch the surface of the touch panel display or break it.
NOTE
Before using the touch panel display, peel off the protective film from the display.
Frequently Used Keys
The following keys on the touch panel display are used frequently:
Press to close the current setting screen, retaining the
programmed settings from the Additional Functions screen.
Press to cancel the mode (function) that is either being set, or has
already been set on screens other than the Additional Functions
screen.
Press to set the mode (function) and proceed to the next setting
procedure.
Press to go back to the previous procedure, saving the setting
already made, when setting a mode (function).
Press to close the current screen.
Press to confirm the current setting of a mode (function).
1-40
Using the Touch Panel Display
Touch Panel Key Display
When you press a key on the touch panel display, that key is highlighted, and the
corresponding mode (function) is set. When you set certain modes, the characters
on some keys may become grayed out. You cannot press keys that are grayed out.
This means that you cannot set these modes in combination with the presently set
mode.
State of Keys
Before You Start Using This Machine
■ Mode Setting Keys
Description
Key is not selected. It is available for selection.
Key is selected. It is available for selection.
Key is highlighted.
The text is grayed out.
Indicates a mode that cannot be set in
combination with a previously selected mode.
■ Keys That Change to On/Off When Pressed
Mode Is Turned Off
Mode Is Turned On
(Checked)
(Highlighted)
Keys that have a right triangle ( ) indicate that those keys have additional screens to set
their functions. If you press a key that does not have a right triangle ( ), it turns that mode
On or Off.
Keys That Display Additional Settings
Keys That Turn Modes On or Off
Keys that have a colored triangle ( ) in the lower right corner and that appear on screens
for storing settings, are keys that already have settings stored in them.
Settings Are Stored
No Settings Are Stored
Using the Touch Panel Display
1
1-41
■ Keys That Display a Drop-Down List When Pressed:
When you press a key with a down triangle (▼) in the lower right corner, a list of items to
select is displayed.
Before Selection
Drop-Down List
After Selection
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ Numeric Keys:
When numeric keys are displayed on the touch panel display, you can enter values using
numeric keys on the control panel.
You can enter values using the touch panel display. You can
also enter values using the numeric keys on the control
panel.
Enter values using numeric keys on the control panel.
Adjusting the Brightness
If the touch panel display is difficult to view, use the display contrast dial on the
control panel to adjust its brightness.
NOTE
To make the touch panel display brighter, turn the dial counterclockwise. To make it
darker, turn the dial clockwise.
1-42
Using the Touch Panel Display
Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display
On screens which require alphanumeric entry, enter characters using the keys
displayed on the touch panel display, as shown below.
Entering Alphabet Characters
Example: Enter <Canon>.
1
Press the entry mode drop-down list ➞ select [Alphanum.].
Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display
1-43
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
2
Enter <Canon>.
To enter uppercase characters, press [Shift].
To enter a space, press [Space].
To move the cursor, press [ ] or [ ].
To enter symbols, press the entry mode drop-down list ➞ select [Symbol] ➞
enter the desired symbols.
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
The entered values are displayed, as shown below.
NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering characters, press [ ] or [ ] to position the
cursor ➞ press [Backspace] to delete the characters ➞ enter the correct
characters.
• To delete all of the characters you have entered, press C (Clear).
• The available entry modes, and maximum number of characters that you can enter
vary, depending on the type of entries you are making.
3
1-44
When you have entered all the characters, press [OK].
Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display
Entering Special Characters
Example: Enter <é>.
NOTE
If Language Switch is set to ‘On’, some characters may be restricted, and cannot be
entered.
Press the entry mode drop-down list ➞ select [Symbol].
2
Press [▼] or [▲] to display the desired special character.
3
Press [é].
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
1
To enter a space, press [Space].
To move the cursor, press [ ] or [ ].
To enter alphanumeric characters, press the entry mode drop-down list ➞ select
[Alphanum.] ➞ enter the characters.
Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display
1-45
NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering characters, press [ ] or [ ] to position the
cursor ➞ press [Backspace] to delete the characters ➞ enter the correct
characters.
• To delete all of the characters you have entered, press C (Clear).
The entered characters are displayed, as shown below.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
NOTE
The available entry modes, and maximum number of characters vary, depending
on the type of entries you are making.
4
1-46
When you have entered all characters, press [OK].
Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display
Entering Values in Inches
When entering values in inches in modes which require a numeric entry, set the
Inch Entry mode to ‘On’ in Common Settings from the Additional Functions screen.
You can then enter inches when you press [Inch] on a screen requiring numeric
entry.
1
To enter 1 1/2 inches, press [1] ➞ [_] ➞ [1] ➞ [/] ➞ [2] using the
numeric keys on the touch panel display.
The entered values are displayed, as shown above.
Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display
1-47
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
The following example shows inch entry in the Zoom Program mode.
Entering the Department ID and Password
If Department ID Management has been set, the Department ID and password
must be entered before operating this machine.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
NOTE
• If you are using the optional control card for Department ID Management, the message
<You must insert a control card.> appears on the touch panel display. Insert the control
card into the card slot. (See “Card Reader-C1,” on p. 7-47.)
• If Limit Functions is set, a message prompting you to enter the Department ID or to insert
the control card may be displayed even if you are already using the machine. Follow the
instructions of the message.
• If you are using MEAP applications to manage authentication, the following procedure is
not necessary.
Operations after Turning the Power ON
After turning the power ON, the screen for entering the Department ID and
Password may appear.
NOTE
For instructions on how to turn the power ON, see “Main Power and Control Panel
Power,” on p. 1-32.
1
Use 0 - 9 (numeric keys) to enter your Department ID and
password.
❑ Press [Dept. ID] ➞ enter your Department ID.
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter the password.
If the password has not been set, proceed to step 2.
1-48
Entering the Department ID and Password
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the Department ID or password,
press C (Clear) ➞ enter the correct values.
Press
ID
(ID).
Reset
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ID
0
C
1
Guide
?
Additional Functions
Clear
Processing/Data
Error
The Basic Features screen of the selected function appears on the touch panel
display.
NOTE
If the Department ID or password that you entered are incorrect, the message
<This number has not stored. Enter the number again.> appears. Repeat the
procedure from step 1.
Entering the Department ID and Password
1-49
Before You Start Using This Machine
2
Operations after Using Functions
1
When your operations are complete, press
control panel.
ID
(ID) on the
1
Guide
Before You Start Using This Machine
Reset
Additional Functions
?
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ID
0
C
Clear
Processing/Data
Error
The screen for entering the Department ID and password appears.
NOTE
• To repeat operations, enter the Department ID and password again.
• If you do not press ID (ID) after finishing your operations, any subsequent copies
are totaled under the same Department ID which you previously entered.
• When your operations are complete, the screen for entering the Department ID and
password automatically appears after the set Auto clear time has elapsed, even if
you forget to press ID (ID). (See “Setting the Time for the Display to Return to the
Basic Features Screen after Finishing Operations,” on p. 3-54.)
1-50
Entering the Department ID and Password
Logging in through the Authentication Screens of
SDL and SSO
After you have entered your user name and password, the machine is ready for
use.
NOTE
• For this section, SDL and SSO (Single Sign-On) are used as examples to explain the
procedure. However, if you are using other login services, login procedures may vary.
• For details on selecting and setting login services, contact your local authorized Canon
dealer.
• For instructions on how to register a user, see the MEAP SMS Administrator Guide.
• For instructions on how to turn the power ON, see “Main Power and Control Panel
Power,” on p. 1-32.
1
Press [User Name].
If SDL is set as the login service, a drop-down list that contains the logs of users
who logged in is displayed.
Logging in through the Authentication Screens of SDL and SSO
1-51
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
If you are managing this machine with a login service, such as SDL (Simple Device
Login), enter the user name and password before using this machine.
2
Enter the user name ➞ press [OK].
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
You can also enter values using
3
1-52
0
-
9
(numeric keys).
Press [Password].
Logging in through the Authentication Screens of SDL and SSO
4
Enter the password ➞ press [OK].
You can also enter the password using
0
-
9
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
(numeric keys).
● If SSO is set as a login service, the screen below is displayed:
❑ Enter the user name, password, and DNS domain name.
IMPORTANT
• To use SSO, SA (Security Agent) is required.
• Domain names are being fixed, therefore you cannot enter them at this time.
• If there is more than a 30 minute difference between the current time set in the
computer register by the Active Directory and the time set on the machine, an error
occurs when you log on using SSO. To be able to log on using SSO, it is necessary
to match the current time on both the computer and the machine. For instructions
on setting the current date and time of the machine, see Chapter 3, “Customizing
Settings.”
• You must use the user login name (pre-Windows 2000) registered in Active
Directory in order to then enter a user name for SSO authentication.
• You must use characters other than the following to enter a user name for SSO
authentication:
/\[]:;|=,+*?<>
You can log in only if you use valid characters.
Logging in through the Authentication Screens of SDL and SSO
1-53
5
Press [Log In].
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
The Basic Features screen of the selected function appears on the touch panel
display.
You can also log on by pressing
ID
(ID).
If the user name or password that you entered are incorrect a message appears
prompting you to verify your user name and password. Repeat the procedure
from step 1.
NOTE
Depending on the SDL settings, a drop-down list that enables you to select a login
record may be displayed. For instructions on the settings, see the MEAP SMS
Administrator Guide.
1-54
Logging in through the Authentication Screens of SDL and SSO
Placing Originals
NOTE
If the original has too many pages to be placed in the feeder all at once, use the Job Build
mode. (See Chapter 2, “Additional Copy Functions,” in the Copying Guide, Chapter 2,
“Scanning Originals into an Inbox,” in the Mail Box Guide, or Chapter 1, “Various Sending
Methods,” in the Sending Guide.)
■ Platen Glass
Place the originals on the platen glass when scanning, bound originals, originals on heavy
or lightweight paper, and transparencies.
■ Feeder
Place a stack of originals in the feeder, and press
(Start). The machine automatically
scans them into memory. Two-sided originals can also be automatically turned over and
both sides scanned.
Placing Originals
1-55
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
Set the originals on the platen glass or in the feeder, depending on the paper size
and type that you want to print and the settings that you have entered.
Orientation of Originals
You can place originals either vertically or horizontally. Always align the top edge of
your original with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left
corner), or with the back edge of the feeder.
Platen Glass
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
Place the original
face down.
Place the original
face down.
Vertical Placement
Horizontal Placement
Feeder
Place the original
ABC
Vertical Placement
face up.
ABC
Place the original
face up.
Horizontal Placement
NOTE
• If the top edge of the original is not aligned with the back edge of the platen glass (by the
arrow in the top left corner), your original may not be scanned correctly, depending on the
mode you have set.
• LTR and STMT originals can be placed either vertically or horizontally. However, the
scanning speed for horizontally placed originals is somewhat slower than for vertically
placed originals. You can place originals horizontally when printing with a Preset Zoom
mode, such as when enlarging an LTR original onto 11" x 17" paper.
• Horizontally placed LTR and STMT originals are referred to as LTRR and STMTR.
• 11" x 17" and LGL originals must be placed horizontally.
1-56
Placing Originals
Placing an Original on the Platen Glass
You should use the platen glass when scanning bound originals (such as books
and magazines), originals on heavy or lightweight paper, and transparencies.
1
Lift up the feeder/platen glass cover.
Open/Close Sensor
IMPORTANT
• The machine is equipped with an open/close sensor on the feeder/platen glass
cover (see circled area in the above illustration). When placing originals on the
platen glass, lift up the feeder/platen glass cover about 11 7/8" (30 cm), so that the
sensor detaches from the feeder. If the sensor does not detach from the feeder, the
size of the originals may not be detected correctly.
• Return the original supply tray to its original position, if the original supply tray is
pulled up.
Placing Originals
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
NOTE
The machine automatically detects the size of the following originals: 11" x 17", LGL,
LTR, LTRR, and STMTR.
1-57
2
Place your original face down.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
The surface that you want to copy must be placed face down. Align the top edge
of your original with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left
corner).
Place books and other bound originals on the platen glass in the same way.
When enlarging LTR or STMT originals onto 11" x 17" or LGL paper, place the
originals horizontally on the platen glass, and align them with the LTRR or STMTR
marks.
NOTE
If you are copying STMT originals using the platen glass, you need to set LTRR/
STMT Original Selection from the Additional Functions screen. (See
“Distinguishing between LTRR and STMT Originals,” on p. 3-22.)
1-58
Placing Originals
Gently close the feeder/platen glass cover.
1
CAUTION
• Close the feeder/platen glass cover gently to avoid catching your hands,
as this may result in personal injury.
• Do not press down hard on the feeder/platen glass cover when using the
platen glass to make copies of thick books. Doing so may damage the
platen glass and result in personal injury.
IMPORTANT
If you are placing originals on the platen glass, the size of the original is detected
after the feeder/platen glass cover is closed. Be sure to close the feeder/platen
glass cover before copying.
NOTE
• Remove the original from the platen glass when scanning is complete.
Placing Originals
1-59
Before You Start Using This Machine
3
• STMT and postcard size paper cannot be detected. Follow the instructions on the
touch panel display, and specify the original size or manually select the paper size.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
Placing Originals in the Feeder
Place a stack of originals into the feeder, and press (Start). The machine
automatically feeds the originals onto the platen glass and scans them. Two-sided
originals can also be automatically scanned as two-sided documents.
You can place the following originals into the feeder’s original supply tray:
• Weight:
One-sided scanning: 10 to 32 Ib bond (38 to 128 g/m2)
Two-sided scanning: 13 to 32 Ib bond (50 to 128 g/m2)
• Size: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT
• Tray capacity: 100 sheets (20 Ib bond (80 g/m2))
IMPORTANT
• Do not place the following types of originals in the feeder:
- Originals with tears or large binding holes
- Severely curled originals or originals with sharp folds
- Clipped or stapled originals
- Carbon backed paper or other originals which might not feed smoothly
- Transparencies and other highly transparent originals
• Check the condition of originals which have been fed through the feeder 30 times. (This
frequency differs depending upon the quality of the paper.) Originals which have been
fed through the feeder 30 times can become folded or wrinkled and might not feed
smoothly.
• If the feeder rollers are dirty from scanning originals written in pencil, perform the feeder
cleaning procedure. (See “While Using the Feeder (Feeder Cleaning),” on p. 5-25.)
• When placing folded originals, smooth out the folds first, then place them into the feeder.
1-60
Placing Originals
1
Adjust the slide guides to fit the size of the originals.
2
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
Neatly place your originals face up into the original supply
tray.
Original Set Indicator
If you are enlarging LTR or STMT originals onto 11" x 17" or LGL paper, place
your originals horizontally.
Place your originals as far into the feeder as they will go, until the Original Set
indicator is lit.
Placing Originals
1-61
IMPORTANT
• Do not add or remove originals while they are being scanned.
• When scanning is complete, remove the originals from the original output area to
avoid paper jams.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
Original Output Area
NOTE
• The scanned originals are output face down to the original output area.
• You can place different size originals (i.e., LTR and 11" x 17", STMT and LTRR)
together in one group into the feeder when you set the Different Size Originals
mode. (See Chapter 2, “Additional Copy Functions,” in the Copying Guide, Chapter
2, “Scanning Originals into an Inbox,” in the Mail Box Guide, or Chapter 1, “Various
Sending Methods,” in the Sending Guide.)
1-62
Placing Originals
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
IMPORTANT
• Note the following points when using the stack bypass:
- Copy quantity: 1 to about 50 sheets (stack about 3/16" (5 mm) high)
- Paper size: 4" x 5 7/8" to 11 5/8" x 17" (100 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm)
- Paper weight: 17 lb bond to 110 lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)
- Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use, (Allowable
Curl amount: less than 3/8" (10 mm)). There are some types of paper stock which may
meet the above specifications, but cannot be fed into the stack bypass.
• Load STMT paper horizontally into the stack bypass.
• Do not load different size paper at the same time.
• If you select [Free Size] for copying, you cannot use the Auto Copy Ratio, Entire Image,
Finisher, 1 2-Sided, 2 2-Sided, Book 2-Sided, Two-Page Separation, Cover/Sheet
Insertion, Shift, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Image Combination, Image
Separation, Image Repeat, Form Composition, or Page Numbering modes. (See
Chapter 1, “Basic Copying,” in the Copying Guide or Chapter 2, “Additional Copy
Functions,” in the Copying Guide.)
• If you select [Free Size] for printing documents stored in a Users Inbox, you cannot use
the Finisher, Two-Sided Printing, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Cover/Job Separator, Booklet,
Form Composition, or Page Numbering modes. (See Chapter 4, “Using/Arranging
Documents Stored in an Inbox,” in the Mail Box Guide.)
NOTE
If you want to copy or scan the following types of originals, you cannot use Automatic
Paper Selection. Use Manual Paper Selection instead.
- Highly transparent originals, such as transparencies
- Originals with an extremely dark background
■ Standard Size
You can select standard inch paper, or A or B series paper.
■ Free Size
You can load nonstandard size (4" x 5 7/8" to 11 5/8" x 17" (100 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm
x 432 mm)) paper.
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
1-63
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
If you are making prints on transparencies or nonstandard size paper stock, load
the paper stock into the stack bypass.
1
Open the stack bypass.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
NOTE
If the paper size loaded in the stack bypass is different from the paper size stored
in the Stack Bypass Standard Settings, set the Stack Bypass Standard Settings to
‘Off’. (See “Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass,” on p. 3-35.)
● If the specified paper has already been loaded into the stack bypass:
❑ Press [Paper Select] ➞ [Stack Bypass] to specify the loaded paper ➞ proceed
to step 6.
● If the specified paper is different from the paper which is loaded into
the stack bypass:
❑ Check to see if any job is reserved. (See “Checking Job and Device Status,” on
p. 2-2.)
If there is a current/reserved job, reserve a change of paper for the stack
bypass. (See “Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs,” on p. 169.)
If there is no reserved job, remove any paper remaining in the stack bypass,
and continue the procedure from step 2.
1-64
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
2
Adjust the slide guides to match the size of the paper.
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
Slide Guide
If you are feeding large size paper, pull out the auxiliary tray.
Auxiliary Tray
3
Load the paper into the stack bypass.
Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the limit mark
(
).
Align the required number of sheets of paper with the slide guides. The surface
that you want to print on must be placed face up. Insert the paper into the
machine until it stops.
IMPORTANT
If Stack Bypass Standard Settings is set to ‘On’, you can load only the registered
paper types into the stack bypass.
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
1-65
4
Select the desired paper size ➞ press [Next].
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
If the following screen is displayed, adjust the width of the slide guides ➞ specify
the paper size ➞ press [OK].
If the following screen is displayed, adjust the width of the slide guides to match
the paper size stored in Stack Bypass Standard Settings, or set Stack Bypass
Standard Settings to ‘Off’. (See “Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack
Bypass,” on p. 3-35.)
1-66
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
IMPORTANT
• Set the paper size to the same size as the paper loaded in the stack bypass.
• If Stack Bypass Standard Settings is set to ‘On’, you can load only the registered
paper types into the stack bypass.
NOTE
• When loading paper other than a standard size, press [Free Size].
• To select an A or B series paper size, press [A/B-size].
Before You Start Using This Machine
5
1
Select the paper type ➞ press [OK].
IMPORTANT
Select the correct paper type to avoid a paper jam.
NOTE
• If you select [Free Size], you cannot select [Transparency].
• For details on paper types, see “Available Paper Stock,” on p. 1-75.
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
1-67
6
Press [Done].
Paper Size Selected
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
Paper Size Currently
Loaded
If you press [Stack Bypass Settings], you can reset the paper size and type.
7
Place your originals ➞ select the desired copy settings.
8
Press
(Start).
Copying starts.
NOTE
To cancel all settings and return the machine to the standard mode,
press
(Reset).
1-68
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs
While paper is being fed from the stack bypass for the current print job, you can
specify the paper to be loaded in the stack bypass for the next reserved job.
You can reserve up to five print jobs, including the current job. Interrupt print jobs
are not included in this count.
IMPORTANT
If Stack Bypass Standard Settings is set to ‘On’, you can reserve a job only with the
registered paper types. (See “Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass,” on p. 335.)
1
Place your originals ➞ set the desired print settings.
2
Press [Paper Select] ➞ [Stack Bypass Settings].
When there is no reserved print job, you can designate the paper size by pulling
it out of the stack bypass, and reinserting it.
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
1-69
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
The following example assumes that 11" x 17" plain paper is being fed from the
stack bypass for the current job, and that you are reserving LTR plain paper to be
fed from the stack bypass for the next reserved job.
3
Select the paper size ➞ press [Next].
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
NOTE
• When loading paper other than a standard size, press [Free Size].
• To select an A or B series paper size, press [A/B-size].
• If Stack Bypass Standard Settings is set to ‘On’, the screen which shows the paper
size/type selected beforehand will be displayed. (See “Setting the Standard Paper
for the Stack Bypass,” on p. 3-35.)
4
1-70
Select the paper type ➞ press [OK].
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
The paper size/type currently loaded and the paper size/type that is reserved are
displayed, as shown below.
Paper Size/Type Specified
for the Reserved Job
NOTE
• If [Free Size] is selected, [Transparency] cannot be selected.
• If there is more than one reserved job waiting to print, only the paper size/type
specified for the last reserved job will be shown here and on the Basic Features
screen. For example, if the current job is using LTR plain paper from the stack
bypass, the first reserved job will use LTRR plain paper, the second reserved job
will use LGL plain paper, the third reserved job will use 11" x 17" plain paper, and
the fourth reserved job will use STMTR plain paper. The paper size/type that is
shown here and on the Basic Features screen is STMTR plain paper.
5
Press [Done].
This completes the reserved settings for the paper you plan to load into the stack
bypass.
6
Press
(Start).
When printing documents stored in an inbox, press [Start Print].
3
Stop
Start
6
9
Clear
C
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
1-71
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
Paper Size/Type
Currently Loaded
7
Load the specified paper when its turn comes to print.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
NOTE
• The specified paper size/type is displayed when its turn comes to print.
• Even when setting reserved print settings, and if paper is loaded in the stack
bypass, specify the same paper size and type as specified in steps 2 and 3.
Otherwise, printing will not start.
8
Select the paper size ➞ press [Next].
NOTE
• When loading paper other than a standard size, press [Free Size].
• To select an A or B series paper size, press [A/B-size].
1-72
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
Select the paper type ➞ press [OK].
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
9
Printing starts.
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
1-73
Multifunctional Operations
The imageRUNNER 6020i/5020i and imageRUNNER 6020/5020 offer the user
many functions, such as printing, scanning, copying, and sending, which can be
used together. The following table provides you with the details of multifunctional
operations.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
: Possible
Receive
Net
work
Print
Data
Send
Scan
Net
Copy
work
Mail
Box
: Not Possible
: Conditional
Print
Copy
(Scan,
Received Print
Send Copy
Print)
Document Data
Network
Receive
Send
Print Data
*1
*1
*1
Network
*1
*1
*1
*2
*2
Copy
Scan
Mail Box
Send
Copy
Print
Received
Document
*2
*2
*2
*2
Print Data
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
Copy (Scan, Print)
*1: If image processing (image compression, enlargement/reduction, rotation, etc.) is required, the operating capability may be
reduced.
*2: Jobs are printed according to the Print Priority setting. As each job is completed, the next job in the priority order is printed.
However, an interrupt copy job is printed at the end of a copy set.
IMPORTANT
The Send function is only available on the imageRUNNER 6020i/5020i.
NOTE
• If more than one send/receive job is being performed at the same time, performance of
the network sending and receiving may be reduced.
• Printing from an inbox involves the same procedure as printing data in an inbox.
• Printing remote copy jobs or cascade copy jobs involves the same procedure as printing
copy data.
1-74
Multifunctional Operations
Available Paper Stock
: Possible
: Not Possible
Available Loading Place (Paper Set Place)
Paper Type
Paper Drawer 1, 2 Paper Drawer 3, 4
Stack Bypass
Paper Deck
Plain*1
Recycled*1
Color *1
Heavy*2
Letterhead*3*4
Tracing Paper
Transparency
Labels
3-Hole Punch*1*4*5
Bond*1
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
Plain, Recycled, Color, Bond, and 3-Hole Punch paper are from 17 lb to 24 lb bond (64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2).
Heavy paper is from 25 lb bond to 110 lb index (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2).
Preprinted paper with logos or patterns.
When copying on Letterhead or 3-Hole Punch paper, we recommend that you set the Image Orientation Priority to ‘On’
from the Additional Functions screen. (See Chapter 3, “Customizing Settings,” in the Copying Guide.)
*5: 3-Hole Punch paper can only be set vertically (LTR). Set the 3-Hole Punch paper as follows according to its
orientation:
Left open: when loading paper into the paper drawers, set the paper with the holes on the right side; when loading
paper into the stack bypass, set the paper with the holes on the left side.
Right open: reverse of left open orientation.
Available Paper Stock
1-75
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
The paper types which can be used for this machine are shown in the following
table. The type of paper loaded in a paper drawer is indicated by the icon shown on
the touch panel display for that paper drawer. (See “Identifying the Type of Paper in
a Paper Drawer,” on p. 3-17.)
: Possible
: Not Possible
Available Loading Place (Paper Set Place)
Paper Size
Width x Length
1
LGL
8 1/2" x 14"
LTR
11" x 8 1/2"
LTRR
8 1/2" x 11"
STMTR
Free Size
Stack
Bypass
11" x 17"
Before You Start Using This Machine
11" x 17"
Paper
Paper
Drawer 1, 2 Drawer 3, 4
5 1/2" x 8 1/2"
(4" x 5 7/8" to 11 5/8" x 17")
(100 x 148 mm to 297 x 432 mm)
NOTE
• For instructions on how to load paper, see the following pages:
- Paper drawers: “Loading Paper,” on p. 5-2.
- Paper Deck: “Loading Paper in the Paper Deck,” on p. 7-7.
- Stack bypass: “Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass,” on p. 1-63.
• The paper deck is optional.
1-76
Available Paper Stock
Paper
Deck
Checking Job and Device Status
2
CHAPTER
This chapter explains various methods of confirming and changing print jobs, and related
functions.
Checking Job and Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Confirmation/Cancellation of the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Checking Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Checking Copy and Print Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Printing the Copy and Print Job Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Checking Send Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Performing Send Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Checking Received Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Performing Received Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Canceling from the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Canceling Using the Stop Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Canceling a Job from the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Priority Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Handling Print Jobs Sent from a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Printing Secured Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
2-1
Checking Job and Device Status
If you press [System Monitor], the System Monitor screen appears enabling you to
check and change the status of Copy, Send, Print, and Receive jobs. For example,
you can change the order of jobs in the print queue, cancel a job, check the details
of a job, or print a password protected job (secured print).
2
Checking Job and Device Status
By displaying the Job List for each job type, it is possible to check the present job or
a job waiting to be processed. By displaying the Log List, it is possible to check a
job that has already been processed.
From the System Monitor screen, it is possible to quickly acquire information about
the machine, check the amount of paper remaining in the standard and optional
paper sources, check the amount of memory currently being used, and view any
error messages.
NOTE
• Many of the check/change job operations can also be performed from the Remote UI.
(See Chapter 2, “Remote UI Functions,” in the Remote UI Guide.)
• Each key located at the bottom of the System Monitor screen has a green and red
indicator. The green indicator flashes when the machine is performing that type of job.
The red indicator flashes if an error occurs in the machine. For details on how to handle
errors, see Chapter 6, “Troubleshooting.”
1
2-2
Press [System Monitor].
Checking Job and Device Status
2
From the keys located at the bottom of the System Monitor
screen, select the job type ([Copy], [Send], [Print] or
[Receive]) that you want to check or change, or press [Device]
to display the current status of the machine.
● If a job type ([Copy], [Send], [Print], or [Receive]) is selected:
❑ Press [Status] to check the jobs that are currently being processed or waiting to
be processed.
Checking Job and Device Status
2
[Print] is selected in this example.
❑ Press [Log] to check the jobs that have already been processed.
The log is organized according to job types. Select the job type you want to
check from the Select Type drop-down list.
IMPORTANT
You cannot check the status of send jobs specified from MEAP applications,
because these jobs are not displayed.
Checking Job and Device Status
2-3
NOTE
• The most recent 100 copy or print jobs are displayed in the Log.
• Only the Log can be checked when [Receive] is selected.
• The status of each icon displayed on the screen is as follows:
Icon
(Status of Job)
Description
Operating
Checking Job and Device Status
2
Icon
(Type of Job)
Description
Copy job
Waiting
Send job
Error
Mail Box job
Canceling
Printer job
Paused
Remote copy
Secured job
Report job
Job complete
Local print
● If [Device] is selected:
❑ Check the status of the machine.
The status of the job and
device currently being
processed is displayed.
The amount, type, and
size of the paper loaded
in the paper drawers are
displayed.
Press to show procedures
for clearing paper jams,
etc.
The amount of memory
available is displayed in
percentage.
2-4
Checking Job and Device Status
Confirmation/Cancellation of the Job
When you send print data from a computer, it is stored in this machine as input. The
machine then processes this data and outputs it. This operation is called “Spool.”
NOTE
• The spool status is displayed only if the optional Multi-PDL Printer Kit is attached.
• Operations, such as checking or canceling spool jobs, are possible only if Use Spooler is
set to ‘On’. For details, see the Network Guide.
1
Press [System Monitor].
2
Press [Print].
Checking Job and Device Status
2
Checking Job and Device Status
2-5
3
Press [Spool Status].
4
Press the Spool Type drop-down list.
Checking Job and Device Status
2
2-6
Checking Job and Device Status
● If you want to cancel a job in the spooler:
❑ Press [Spool Status].
❑ Select the job whose spooling you want to cancel ➞ press [Cancel].
❑ Press [Yes].
Checking Job and Device Status
2
If you do not want to cancel the job, press [No].
● If you want to check a job’s detailed information:
❑ Press [Spool Status].
❑ Select the desired job ➞ press [Details] ➞ check the detailed information.
❑ Press [Done].
5
Press [Done].
The display returns to the Basic Features screen.
Checking Job and Device Status
2-7
Checking Job Details
You can check job details, such as the date and time entered, and the number of
pages. For Send job details, you can check each destination when multiple
destinations are specified.
Checking Job and Device Status
2
IMPORTANT
The memory of this machine can store up to 3,700 pages. If a paper jam occurs, or if the
machine runs out of paper, print jobs can be sent even if this maximum capacity has
been reached. However, the last job(s) will not be saved.
Checking Copy and Print Job Details
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ select the job type ([Copy] or
[Print]).
IMPORTANT
To check the details of jobs specified through a MEAP application, select [Print] for
both Copy and Print jobs.
2-8
Checking Job Details
2
Press [Status] or [Log] ➞ select the job whose details you
want to check ➞ press [Details].
3
Checking Job and Device Status
2
Check the detailed information ➞ press [Done] repeatedly
until the Basic Features screen appears.
Checking Job Details
2-9
Printing the Copy and Print Job Logs
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ select the job type ([Copy] or
[Print]).
2
Press [Log] ➞ [Print List].
Checking Job and Device Status
2
If you select [Print] in step 1, select a job type from the Select Type drop-down
list ➞ press [Print List].
NOTE
If plain or recycled paper (11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR) is loaded in a paper
drawer that has been set to ‘On’ when you press [Other] to select a paper source in
Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS (from the Additional Functions screen), you can
print a list. (See “Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer
Switching,” on p. 3-14.)
2-10
Checking Job Details
3
Press [Yes].
If you do not want to print, press [No].
The Copy Log List is printed if you selected [Copy]. The Print Log List is printed if
you selected [Print].
4
Press [Done].
The display returns to the Basic Features screen.
Checking Job Details
2-11
Checking Job and Device Status
2
Checking Send Job Details
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Send].
2
Press [Status] or [Log] ➞ select the job whose details you
want to check ➞ press [Details].
Checking Job and Device Status
2
IMPORTANT
You cannot check the status of send jobs specified from MEAP applications,
because these jobs are not displayed.
NOTE
If you set Erase Failed TX to ‘Off’, and specify multiple destinations, the job status
screen of the specified destinations that were completed without errors indicates
<Finished.>. Also in this case, if you select any of these destinations and cancel
their jobs, their job details are indicated on the job log screen.
2-12
Checking Job Details
3
Confirm the details.
To change the address, press [Change Destination]. (See “Changing the
Destination,” on p. 2-14.)
If you want to resend a job, press [Resend]. (See “Resending a Send Job,” on p.
2-17.)
If you want to print the job status details or log, press [Print List]. (See “Printing
the Send Job Status/Log,” on p. 2-19.)
If you are sending to multiple recipients using the same sending method, you
can display the Broadcast List. Press [Broadcast List] to confirm the recipients
and status.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Checking Job Details
2-13
Checking Job and Device Status
2
Performing Send Jobs
You can change the destination of the send job or resend a job that had an error.
Changing the Destination
You can change the destination of a send job from the System Monitor screen.
IMPORTANT
• Destinations can be changed only for send standby jobs set with delayed send, or jobs
which have been canceled from sending due to an error.
• To change the address of a job with a send error, set Erase Failed TX to ‘Off’ from the
Additional Functions screen. (See Chapter 3, “Setting/Storing the Communications
Settings,” in the Sending Guide.)
• Multiple destinations cannot be changed at the same time. Also, sending destinations
within a group cannot be changed at one time.
• If there is any job being processed or in the Send queue that has the same job number
as the destination you want to change, the change cannot be made (except for Delayed
Send jobs).
• You cannot check the status of send jobs specified from MEAP applications, because
these jobs are not displayed.
Checking Job and Device Status
2
NOTE
• You cannot change the destination type. For example, you cannot make changes so that
the jobs sent to an e-mail address are sent to an I-fax address.
• If you want to send the document to an inbox, you cannot change the inbox number.
2-14
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Send].
2
Press [Status] ➞ select the job to be changed ➞ press
[Details].
Checking Job Details
Press [Change Destination].
2
If you are sending to multiple destinations using the same sending method,
[Broadcast List] is displayed. Press [Broadcast List] ➞ select the destination to
be changed ➞ press [Change Destination].
Checking Job Details
2-15
Checking Job and Device Status
3
4
Change the destination.
Checking Job and Device Status
2
The destinations which can be changed and their details are as follows.
• E-mail: E-mail address
• I-Fax: I-Fax address
• File: Host name, file path, user name, password
5
6
2-16
Press [OK].
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Checking Job Details
Resending a Send Job
You can resend a document that was not sent due to an error.
IMPORTANT
To change the address of the job with a send error, set Erase Failed TX to ‘Off’ from the
Additional Functions screen. (See Chapter 3, “Setting/Storing the Communications
Settings,” in the Sending Guide.)
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Send].
2
Press [Status] ➞ select the job to resend ➞ press [Details].
Checking Job Details
2-17
Checking Job and Device Status
2
3
Press [Resend].
Checking Job and Device Status
2
If you are sending to multiple destinations using the same sending method,
[Broadcast List] is displayed. Press [Broadcast List] ➞ select the destination ➞
press [Resend].
4
2-18
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Checking Job Details
Printing the Send Job Status/Log
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Send].
2
Press [Status] or [Log] ➞ [Print List].
Checking Job and Device Status
2
IMPORTANT
You cannot print the TX Reserve List for Send jobs specified from MEAP
applications, because these jobs are not displayed.
NOTE
If plain or recycled paper (11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR) is loaded in a paper
drawer that has been set to ‘On’ when you press [Other] to select a paper source in
Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS (from the Additional Functions screen), you can
print a list. (See “Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer
Switching,” on p. 3-14.)
Checking Job Details
2-19
3
Press [Yes].
Checking Job and Device Status
2
If you do not want to print, press [No].
If you selected [Status], the TX Reserve List is printed. If you selected [Log], the
Activity Report is printed.
4
Press [Done].
The display returns to the Basic Features screen.
2-20
Checking Job Details
Checking Received Job Details
You can check details about received jobs, such as the reception date and time,
and number of pages.
IMPORTANT
You cannot check the details of jobs that have been received through MEAP applications.
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Receive].
2
Select the job whose details you want to check ➞ press
[Details].
Checking Job and Device Status
2
1
NOTE
The status of each icon displayed on the left side of the list is as follows:
: A job for which an Activity Report has already been printed.
: A job for which an Activity Report has not yet been printed.
Checking Job Details
2-21
3
Confirm the details.
Checking Job and Device Status
2
4
2-22
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Checking Job Details
Performing Received Jobs
You can confirm the status of forwarding jobs and print the Received Job log.
Printing a Received Job Log
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Receive].
2
Press [Print List].
2
Checking Job and Device Status
1
NOTE
If plain or recycled paper (11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR) is loaded in a paper
drawer that has been set to ‘On’ when you press [Other] to select a paper source in
Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS (from the Additional Functions screen), you can
print a list. (See “Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer
Switching,” on p. 3-14.)
Checking Job Details
2-23
3
Select [Yes].
Checking Job and Device Status
2
If you do not want to print, press [No].
The Activity Report is printed.
4
Press [Done].
The display returns to the Basic Features screen.
Checking Received I-Fax Jobs
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Receive].
2
Press [Checking RX of I-Fax Jobs].
A message that the job is being checked is displayed.
2-24
Checking Job Details
NOTE
To use [Checking RX of I-Fax Jobs], set the E-mail/I-Fax POP settings to ‘On’ (from
the Additional Functions screen) so that you can receive documents using POP
(Post Office Protocol).
3
Press [Done].
The display returns to the Basic Features screen.
You can check the details of a job while the job is being forwarded, using
Forwarding Settings.
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Receive].
2
Press [Forwarding Status] ➞ select the job whose details you
want to check ➞ press [Details].
Checking Job Details
2-25
Checking Job and Device Status
2
Checking Forwarded Job Details
3
Confirm the details.
Checking Job and Device Status
2
4
2-26
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Checking Job Details
Canceling a Job
This section explains how to cancel a job in several ways.
Canceling from the Touch Panel Display
Checking Job and Device Status
1
2
Press [Cancel] on the screen which appears while the
machine is scanning, printing, or waiting to print the
document.
The selected job is canceled.
NOTE
When you cancel a job during scanning, be sure to remove the original of that job.
Canceling a Job
2-27
Canceling Using the Stop Key
You can cancel a job by pressing
1
Press
(Stop), when the job has been scanned.
(Stop).
ON / OFF
Checking Job and Device Status
2
3
Stop
Start
6
9
Clear
When canceling a job which is being printed, press [Cancel] on the touch panel
display on the screen that appears during printing.
2
Select the job to be canceled from the list ➞ press [Cancel].
You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them all at once.
When canceling multiple jobs, select and cancel one job at a time.
If you do not want to cancel the job, press [Resume Copying].
The selected job is canceled.
3
2-28
Press [Resume Copying].
Canceling a Job
Canceling a Job from the System Monitor Screen
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ select the job type ([Copy], [Send],
or [Print]).
NOTE
If you want to cancel remote or cascade copy jobs from the machine that is
scanning the original, press [Copy] on the System Monitor screen.
2
Press [Status].
3
Select the job to be canceled ➞ press [Cancel].
Checking Job and Device Status
2
You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them all at once.
If multiple jobs need to be canceled, select and cancel one job at a time.
The job in the process of sending may not be canceled even if you press
[Cancel].
Canceling a Job
2-29
4
Press [Yes].
Checking Job and Device Status
2
If you do not want to cancel the job, press [No].
NOTE
The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No Good) on the Log screen.
5
Press [Done].
The display returns to the Basic Features screen.
2-30
Canceling a Job
Priority Printing
When you set priority printing for a job, the machine starts printing the job once the
current print job is complete.
2
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Print].
2
Press [Status].
3
Select the job for priority printing ➞ press [Print Next].
Checking Job and Device Status
1
Priority Printing
2-31
4
Press [Done].
The display returns to the Basic Features screen.
Checking Job and Device Status
2
2-32
Priority Printing
Handling Print Jobs Sent from a Computer
You can temporarily stop a print job sent from a computer, or skip a print error if it
occurs.
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Print].
2
Press [Status].
3
Select the desired job ➞ press [Details].
Handling Print Jobs Sent from a Computer
Checking Job and Device Status
2
2-33
4
Select how to handle this print job.
Checking Job and Device Status
2
If you press [Pause], printing stops temporarily, and the key changes to
[Resume]. If you press [Resume], printing resumes, and the key changes to
[Pause].
You can continue the print job even when a print error occurs, by pressing [Auto
Continue], depending on the type of print error. However, the print output may not
be the same as expected.
If printing is canceled from a computer or if the data is less than one page, the
print job may not be processed correctly. Press [Form Feed], to force the print
data remaining in memory to be output.
5
2-34
When you are finished handling the print job, press [Done]
repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.
Handling Print Jobs Sent from a Computer
Printing Secured Documents
You can print documents that have been assigned a password and sent to this
machine from a computer. Documents with a password are called “secured
documents.”
IMPORTANT
• If the main power is turned OFF, any secured documents are erased.
• The secured document is erased after printing is complete.
• You cannot change the settings of the secured document.
• Please note that the memory of the machine can store up to 3,700 pages. When you
send a secured document to be stored in the memory to be printed at a later time, and
the memory is full (already reached its maximum capacity), your document will not be
stored. The memory may be full because the machine is being used for other functions
(such as storing a document in an inbox or storing a form). Therefore, the space reserved
for secured documents decreases. In this case, the last job is not saved.
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Print].
2
Press [Status].
Printing Secured Documents
2-35
2
Checking Job and Device Status
Secured documents waiting to be printed are displayed with the locked icon
to
the left of the job number. To print these documents, you need to enter the correct
password. This prevents unauthorized people who do not know the password from
observing the contents of the print job.
3
Select the desired secured document ➞ press [Secured
Print].
Checking Job and Device Status
2
4
Enter the correct password using
press [OK].
0
-
9
(numeric keys) ➞
Enter the same password that you originally assigned to the document at the
computer. The machine becomes ready to print the secured document.
To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
Printing starts.
NOTE
If there is a current or reserved job, the machine starts printing after that job is
complete.
5
Press [Done].
The display returns to the Basic Features screen.
2-36
Printing Secured Documents
Customizing Settings
3
CHAPTER
This chapter describes initial settings and procedures and how to customize them to suit your
needs.
Additional Functions Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings) . . . . . . .3-8
Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Selecting the Default Display after Auto Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Setting the Entry Tone, Error Tone, and the Job Done Tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Setting Inch Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
Setting Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Distinguishing between LTRR and STMT Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Setting a Dedicated Tray for Each Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Setting the Printing Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Storing an Image Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Setting the Standard Local Print Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Changing the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Reversing the Display Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
Setting the Offset Jobs Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48
Setting the Current Date and Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48
Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52
Setting the Time for the Display to Return to the Basic Features
Screen after Finishing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54
Setting the Time for the Unit to Quiet Down after the Last Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55
Setting the Time for the Unit’s Power to Turn OFF on Different Days of the Week . . . . . . . . . . .3-57
Setting the Low-Power Mode Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58
Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60
Making a Zoom Fine Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60
Staple Repositioning for the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-61
Changing the Saddle Stitch Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-63
Adjusting the Standard Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-65
Adjusting the Page Number Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-66
3-1
3. Customizing Settings
Report Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-68
Specifying Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Printing Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Customizing Settings
3
3-2
Additional Functions Settings Table
The following settings can be selected or stored from the Additional Functions
screen. For details on settings not explained in this manual, see the following
guides:
• Copy
Settings ................................................................ Copying Guide
(Including the settings for remote copy prints)
• Communications Settings, Address Book Settings ....... Sending Guide
• Mail Box Settings........................................................... Mail Box Guide
• Printer
Settings .............................................................. PS/PCL Printer Guide
• Network Settings ........................................................... Network Guide
Additional Functions
Available Settings
Applicable
Page
Common Settings
Initial Function
Select Initial Function:
Copy*/Send**/Mail Box*/MEAP**
Set [System Monitor] as the Initial Function:
On/Off*
Set [Device] as the default screen for [System Monitor]:
On*/Off
p. 3-8
Auto Clear Setting
Initial Function*/Selected Function
p. 3-10
Audible Tones
Entry Tone/Error Tone/Job Done Tone (All On*/Off)
p. 3-11
Inch Entry
On*/Off
p. 3-13
Drawer Eligibility For APS/
ADS
Copy/Printer/Mail Box/Receive/Other (Bypass: On/Off*,
Drawers: On*/Off)
Copy: Consider Paper Type: On/Off*
p. 3-14
Store Paper Type
Paper drawer (1, 2), Paper Deck: Plain*/Recycled/Color/
Letterhead/Bond/3-Hole Punch**/Heavy
p. 3-17
Paper drawer (3, 4): Plain*/Recycled/Color/Letterhead/
Bond/3-Hole Punch**/Heavy
Energy Consumption in
Sleep Mode
Low*/High
p. 3-21
LTRR/STMT Original
Selection
Distinguish Manually/Use LTRR Format*/Use STMT
Format
p. 3-22
Additional Functions Settings Table
3-3
Customizing Settings
3
Additional Functions
Available Settings
Applicable
Page
Common Settings
Tray Designation**
Tray A: Copy*/Printer*/Mail Box*/Receive*/Other*
Tray B: Copy*/Printer*/Mail Box*/Receive*/Other*
p. 3-24
Printing Priority
1: Copy (Priority) 2: Printer 3: Mail Box, Receive, Other
p. 3-26
Store Form for Form
Composition
Store (Entire Image Composition/Transparent Image)/
Erase/Check Print/Details
p. 3-28
Stack Bypass Standard
Settings
On/Off*
p. 3-35
Standard Local Print
Settings
Paper Select: Auto*/Select Paper Supply
Copies: 1* to 2,000 sets
Finisher:
With the Finisher**
Do Not Collate/Collate/Offset Collate*/Group/
Offset Group/Staple (Corner (Top Left/Bottom Left/
Top Right/Bottom Right), Double (Left/Right))
With the Finisher + Puncher Unit-B1**
Do not Collate/Collate/Offset Collate*/Group/Offset
p. 3-39
Group/Staple (Corner (Top Left/Bottom Left/Top
Right/Bottom Right), Double (Left/Right))/Hole Punch
With the Copy Tray-C3**
Do Not Collate/Collate*/Rotate Collating/Group/
Rotate Grouping
Two-sided Print: On/Off*
Erase Document After Printing: On/Off*
Merge Documents: On/Off*
Language Switch
On/Off*
p. 3-41
Reversed Display (Color)
On/Off*
p. 3-43
Offset Jobs
On*/Off
p. 3-44
Initialize Common Settings
Initialize
p. 3-45
Customizing Settings
3
3-4
Additional Functions Settings Table
Additional Functions
Available Settings
Applicable
Page
Timer Settings
Default Setting (12-digit number)
Time Zone: GMT–12:00 to GMT+12:00, (GMT–05:00*)
Daylight Saving Time: On*/Off
p. 3-48
Auto Sleep Time
10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min., 1 hour*, 90 min., 2, 3, 4
hours
p. 3-52
Auto Clear Time
0 (no setting), 1 to 9 min., 2 min.*
p. 3-54
Time Until Unit Quiets Down
0 (no setting), 1 to 9 min., 1 min.*
p. 3-55
Daily Timer Settings
Sunday to Saturday, 00:00 to 23:59 in one-minute
increments
p. 3-57
Low-power Mode Time
10, 15*, 20, 30, 40, 50 min., 1 hour, 90 min., 2, 3, 4
hours
p. 3-58
Zoom Fine Adjustment**
X/Y: 0*, –1.0% to +1.0% in 0.1% increments
p. 3-60
Saddle Stitcher Staple
Repositioning**
Press [Start]
p. 3-61
Saddle Stitch Position
Adjustment**
–2.0 mm to +2.0 mm (0 mm*) in 0.25 mm increments
p. 3-63
Exposure Recalibration
Copy/Send: 9 steps, 5*
p. 3-65
Page Number Position
Adjustment
3/16" to 13/16" (5 mm to 20 mm) 7/16"* (12 mm)
p. 3-66
Feeder Cleaning
Press [Start]
p. 5-25
Wire Cleaning
Press [Start]
p. 5-26
Settings**
Send
p. 3-68
Print List
Send
Network
p. 3-75
3
Customizing Settings
Date & Time Settings
Adjustment/Cleaning
Report Settings
Additional Functions Settings Table
3-5
Additional Functions
Available Settings
Applicable
Page
System Settings
System Manager Settings
System Manager ID:
System Password:
System Manager:
E-mail Address:
Contact Information:
Comment:
Dept. ID Management
Department ID Management: On/Off* (Store Dept.
ID/Password, Print Totals, Accept Jobs With
Unknown ID: On*/Off)
p. 4-8
Communications Settings**
E-mail/I-Fax Settings
Maximum Data Size For Sending: 0 = Off/1-99MB
3MB*
Default Subject: Attached Image
Full Mode TX Timeout: 1-99 Hours, 24 Hours*
Print MDN/DSN on Receipt: On/Off*
Always send notice for RX errors: On*/Off
Use Send Via Server: On/Off*
Memory RX Inbox Settings
Memory RX Inbox Password: 7 digit number max.
Use I-Fax Memory Lock: On/Off*
Memory Lock Start Time: Everyday, Select Days,
Off*
Memory Lock End Time: Everyday, Select Days,
Off*
p. 4-32
Remote UI
On*/Off
p. 4-50
Manage/Access to Address
Book**
Address Book Password: 7 digit number max.
Access Number Management: On/Off*
p. 4-52
Device Information Settings
Device Name: 32 characters
Location:
32 characters
p. 4-56
Forwarding Settings**
Validate/Invalidate, Store, Forward w/o Conditions,
Edit, Erase, Print List, E-mail Priority
p. 4-58
Clear Message Board
Erase
p. 4-88
Auto Online/Offline**
Auto Online: On/Off*
Auto Offline: On/Off*
p. 4-90
MEAP Settings
Use HTTP: On*/Off
Print System Information
p. 4-93
Store LDAP Server
Store, Edit, Erase, Print List
p. 4-97
Customizing Settings
3
3-6
Additional Functions Settings Table
7 digit number max.
7 digit number max.
32 characters max.
64 characters max.
32 characters max.
32 characters max.
p. 4-3
NOTE
• An asterisk (*) indicates the factory default setting.
• Two asterisks (**) indicate items that appear only when the appropriate optional
equipment is attached.
• For instructions on how to set the modes not described in this manual, refer to the
appropriate Operation Manual listed in the front of this Reference Guide. (See “Manuals
for the Machine.”)
• Depending on the types of optional equipment attached, some items may not be
displayed.
Customizing Settings
3
Additional Functions Settings Table
3-7
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each
Function (Common Settings)
This section describes how to specify the settings that are common to the Copy,
Send, and Mail Box functions.
NOTE
The Common Settings screen is made up of several screens. Press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to
the desired screen, and make the required settings.
Customizing Settings
3
Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON
You can specify which screen to display when you turn ON the main power or after
the Auto Clear function has taken place. The System Monitor screen can also be
specified as the initial screen.
NOTE
The default settings are:
- Select Initial Function: ‘Copy’
- Set [System Monitor] as the Initial Function: ‘Off’
- Set [Device] as the default screen for [System Monitor]: ‘On’
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Initial Function].
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
3-8
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
2
Select [Copy], [Send], [Mail Box], or [MEAP] ➞ press [OK].
When the main power is turned ON, or after Auto Clear initiates:
If you select [Copy]: The Copy Basic Features screen appears.
If you select [Send]: The Send Basic Features screen appears.
If you select [Mail Box]: The Inbox Selection screen appears.
If you select [MEAP]: The MEAP application screen appears. (If no MEAP
application is installed, a message telling you that there is no MEAP application
installed appears.)
[Send] is only displayed if you are using the imageRUNNER 6020i/5020i.
● If you want to set the System Monitor screen as the initial screen:
❑ Select [On] for <Set [System Monitor] as the Initial Function> ➞ press [OK].
The System Monitor screen appears when the main power is turned ON, or
after Auto Clear initiates.
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
If you do not want to set the Device status screen as the default screen when you
press [System Monitor], press [Off] under <Set [Device] as the default screen for
[System Monitor]> ➞ press [OK]. If you select [Off], the Copy Job Status screen is
set as the default screen.
3
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3-9
Customizing Settings
3
Selecting the Default Display after Auto Clear
You can set whether the screen specified as the Initial Function is displayed after
Auto Clear initiates.
NOTE
• The time delay for Auto Clear can be set. (See “Setting the Time for the Display to Return
to the Basic Features Screen after Finishing Operations,” on p. 3-54.)
• The default setting is ‘Initial Function’.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞ [Auto
Clear Setting].
Customizing Settings
3
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
3-10
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
2
Select [Initial Function] or [Selected Function] ➞ press [OK].
Press [Initial Function]: To display the screen set as the Initial Function after Auto
Clear is performed. For example, if the System Monitor screen is set as the Initial
Function, and Auto Clear initiates after setting the Mail Box function, the display
returns to the System Monitor screen.
Press [Selected Function]: To display the screen before Auto Clear initiates. For
example, if the System Monitor screen is set as the Initial Function, and Auto
Clear is performed after setting the Mail Box function, the display returns to the
Inbox Selection screen.
The selected mode is set.
3
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting the Entry Tone, Error Tone, and the Job Done Tone
You can select whether to sound audible tones. The following tones sound at the
following times:
• Entry Tone: When
pressing keys on the control panel or keys on the touch panel
display
• Error Tone: When a malfunction occurs (e.g., paper jam or an operational error)
• Job Done Tone: After the last job has been performed (i.e., outputting or stapling
is complete)
NOTE
The default setting is ‘On’ for all tones.
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3-11
Customizing Settings
3
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Audible Tones].
Customizing Settings
3
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
2
Select [On] or [Off] for the desired tones ➞ press [OK].
The selected mode is set.
3
3-12
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
Setting Inch Input
You can display the keys for entering values in inches on the numeric entry
screens.
NOTE
• The default setting is ‘On’.
• Even if Inch Entry is set to ‘On’, you still have the option to enter measurements in
millimeters by pressing [mm].
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞ [Inch
Entry].
3
Customizing Settings
1
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3-13
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Settings
3
The selected mode is set.
3
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/Auto
Drawer Switching
The paper drawers used for Automatic Paper Selection and Auto Drawer Switching
can be set. This setting can be made independently for the Copy, Printer, Mail Box,
Receive, and Other functions. It is useful when different paper drawers are used for
different purposes.
NOTE
• Paper drawers set to ‘On’ are used for the following functions:
- APS (Auto Paper Selection): The machine automatically selects the appropriate paper
size (paper drawer) based on the original’s size and copy ratio settings.
- ADS (Auto Drawer Switching): If a paper drawer runs out of paper during a continuous
print job, the machine automatically selects another paper drawer with the same paper
size, and begins feeding paper from that paper drawer.
• The default settings are ‘Off’ for the stack bypass and ‘On’ for paper drawers 1 to 4.
3-14
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS].
Customizing Settings
3
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
2
Select [Copy], [Printer], [Mail Box], [Receive], or [Other].
The prints from a Remote Copy job are included in [Copy].
[Receive] can only be selected if you are using the imageRUNNER 6020i/5020i.
Remote copying can only be used if you are using the imageRUNNER
6020i/5020i.
You can select [Other] if you are setting the paper drawers to be used for printing
reports.
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3-15
3
Select [On] or [Off] for the stack bypass and each paper
drawer ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Settings
3
[On]: Makes the paper drawer eligible for APS/ADS.
[Off]: Makes the paper drawer ineligible for APS/ADS.
The number of each paper drawer is indicated in the following places:
Stack Bypass
Paper Drawer 1
Paper Drawer 2
Paper Drawer 3
Paper Drawer 4
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
• You cannot select ‘Off’ for any paper source other than the stack bypass.
• If you selected [Copy], in step 2, you can select whether the machine considers the
paper type loaded in a paper drawer.
- If [Consider Paper Type] is set to ‘On’, the paper is not fed even when it runs out
during printing, unless another paper drawer is loaded with the same paper size
and type. For details on stored paper types, see “Identifying the Type of Paper in a
Paper Drawer,” on p. 3-17.
- If you set [Consider Paper Type] to ‘Off’, the paper will be fed from another paper
drawer when it runs out during printing, if the same paper size is loaded in that
paper drawer.
• The Stack Bypass Symbol ( ) is not displayed when [Printer] is selected.
3-16
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer
You can specify the paper type loaded in each paper drawer.
2
3
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].
3
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Store Paper Type] appears ➞ press
[Store Paper Type].
Customizing Settings
1
Select the paper drawer for which you want to store the paper
type.
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3-17
The number of each paper drawer is indicated in the following places:
Paper Drawer 1
Paper Drawer 2
Paper Drawer 3
Paper Drawer 4
Customizing Settings
3
4
Select the paper type loaded in the paper drawer ➞ press
[OK].
Load the same type of paper as the stored paper type in each paper drawer.
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
For details on paper types, see “Available Paper Stock,” on p. 1-75.
3-18
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
NOTE
The paper types stored here are displayed through the use of icons on the paper
selection screen, as shown below.
Customizing Settings
3
Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting
You can reduce the power that is consumed by the machine by changing the
Energy Saver mode setting.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘–10%’.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3-19
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Energy Saver Mode] appears ➞ press
[Energy Saver Mode].
3
Select [–10%], [–25%], [–50%], or [None] ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Settings
3
The approximate energy saving figures for each mode, and the approximate
delay times from power ON to Ready to Print status are listed below.
• –10%: 10% less power (approximately 50 seconds)
• –25%: 25% less power (approximately 90 seconds)
• –50%: 50% less power (approximately 180 seconds)
• None: 2% less power (approximately 0 seconds)
• The figures in parentheses ( ) show the approximate time it takes for the
machine to return to the Ready to Print status.
The selected mode is set.
4
3-20
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
Setting Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode
You can set the amount of energy consumption when the machine is in the Sleep
Mode.
NOTE
• When the printer or sending functions are attached to the machine, the Energy
Consumption in the Sleep Mode setting may be set automatically depending on the
network settings or the status of jobs.
• The default setting is ‘Low’.
2
Press
3
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode]
appears ➞ press [Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode].
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3-21
Customizing Settings
1
3
Select [Low] or [High] ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Settings
3
The selected mode is set.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Distinguishing between LTRR and STMT Originals
You can designate the way the machine handles LTRR or STMT originals placed on
the platen glass. For example, you can make a setting to distinguish the original
sizes manually, or scan the originals of only one of these sizes.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘Use LTRR Format’.
1
3-22
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [LTRR/STMT Original Selection] appears
➞ press [LTRR/STMT Original Selection].
3
Customizing Settings
3
Select [Distinguish Manually], [Use LTRR Format], or [Use
STMT Format] ➞ press [OK].
[Distinguish Manually]: If you place an LTRR or STMT original on the platen glass,
a screen enabling you to select the original size appears when scanning.
[Use LTRR Format]: If you place an LTRR or STMT original on the platen glass,
the machine detects the original as LTRR.
[Use STMT Format]: If you place an LTRR or STMT original on the platen glass,
the machine detects the original as STMT.
The selected mode is set.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3-23
Setting a Dedicated Tray for Each Function
You can select the function for which each output tray of the finishers (optional) is to
be used.
NOTE
• It is possible to assign a single tray to multiple functions.
• We recommend attaching the supplied labels to the trays to identify their respective uses.
Blank labels are also provided.
• The default settings are:
- Tray A: ‘Copy’, ‘Printer’, ‘Mail Box’, ‘Receive’, and ‘Other’
- Tray B: ‘Copy’, ‘Printer’, ‘Mail Box’, ‘Receive’, and ‘Other’
Customizing Settings
3
1
2
3-24
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Tray Designation] appears ➞ press
[Tray Designation].
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3
Select the functions for dedicated output trays A and B ➞
press [OK].
You can only select [Printer] if the optional Multi-PDL Printer Kit is attached.
The prints from a Remote Copy job are included in [Copy].
You can only select [Receive] if you are using the imageRUNNER 6020i/5020i.
Select [Other] if you are printing from the Report function.
If you want to set a tray as the designated tray for only a certain function, select
only that function.
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
When the paper reaches the stacking limit of the tray, while both trays are set as
the designated tray for a certain function, the machine automatically changes the
output tray to another available tray. However, it is recommended that a single
output tray should be assigned for received I-fax documents to prevent them from
being lost, as shown below.
- Tray A: Copy and Printer
- Tray B: Mail Box, Receive, and Other
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3-25
Customizing Settings
3
Setting the Printing Priority
You can set the printing priority. A job that is set as a high priority is printed after the
current job is complete.
NOTE
• Priority printing does not take place even if you set it as the highest priority until the
current job is complete. However, if the current job is paused, a job with a higher priority
may start printing depending upon the settings.
• The default settings are:
- Copy: ‘1’ (Highest priority)
- Printer: ‘2’
- Mail Box: ‘3’
- Receive: ‘3’
- Other: ‘3’ (1, 2, and 3 indicate the priority sequence.)
Customizing Settings
3
1
2
3-26
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Printing Priority] appears ➞ press
[Printing Priority].
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3
Select the printing priority for the various functions ➞ press
[OK].
Selecting [1] sets the highest printing priority.
You can only select [Printer] if the optional Multi-PDL Printer Kit is attached.
The prints from a Remote Copy job are included in [Copy].
You can only select [Receive] if you are using the imageRUNNER 6020i/5020i.
Select [Other] if you are printing from the Report function.
The PDL prints from MEAP applications are included in [Printer]. The Local prints
from MEAP applications are included in [Mail Box].
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
If the same printing priority has been specified for multiple functions, printing starts
with the job that is first processed to print.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3-27
Customizing Settings
3
Storing an Image Form
If you store image forms, you can use the Form Composition mode in the Copy and
Mail Box functions. For instructions on how to use the Form Composition mode,
see Chapter 2, “Additional Copy Functions,” in the Copying Guide, or Chapter 4,
“Using/Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox,” in the Mail Box Guide.
IMPORTANT
• Up to 100 image forms can be stored. However, this number varies depending upon the
capacity of the hard disk.
• Be sure to place the original that contains the image form on the platen glass. It is not
possible to scan an image form from the feeder.
3
Customizing Settings
NOTE
Image forms from an Entire Image Composition can also be retrieved from a personal
computer and stored in the machine.
1
2
3-28
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Store Form for Form Composition]
appears ➞ press [Store Form for Form Composition].
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3
Press [Store].
4
Select the size of the original that contains the image form ➞
press [Next].
NOTE
To select an A or B series paper size, press [A/B-size].
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3-29
Customizing Settings
3
5
Select a form feature.
Customizing Settings
3
● If [Entire Image Composition] is selected:
❑ Press [Next].
3-30
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
● If [Transparent Image] is selected:
❑ Adjust the halftone density by pressing [–] or [+] ➞ press [Next].
You can enter a value from 20% to 99% (in one percent increments).
Even when you enter the values using
the values by pressing [–] or [+].
6
0
-
9
(numeric keys), you can change
Set the scanning mode.
If you want to change the scanning ratio, press [Copy Ratio]. (See Chapter 1,
“Basic Copying,” in the Copying Guide or Chapter 2, “Scanning Originals into an
Inbox,” in the Mail Box Guide.)
If you want to change the scanning exposure, press [ ] or [ ]. (See Chapter 1,
“Basic Copying,” in the Copying Guide or Chapter 2, “Scanning Originals into an
Inbox,” in the Mail Box Guide.)
If you want to select the image quality for scanning, select the type of original
from the image quality drop down list. (See Chapter 1, “Basic Copying,” in the
Copying Guide or Chapter 2, “Scanning Originals into an Inbox,” in the Mail Box
Guide.)
If you want to set the Nega/Posi and Sharpness modes, press [Special Features]
➞ set each function. (See Chapter 2, “Additional Copy Functions,” in the
Copying Guide or Chapter 2, “Scanning Originals into an Inbox,” in the Mail Box
Guide.)
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3-31
Customizing Settings
3
If you want to store a name for the image form, press [Form Name] ➞ enter the
form name ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Settings
3
NOTE
• For instructions on how to enter characters on the touch panel display, see
“Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display,” on p. 1-43.
• You can enter up to 24 characters for the form name.
• If you do not enter the form name, the date and time will be displayed instead.
7
Place the original that contains the image form on the platen
glass ➞ press
(Start).
The image form is stored and displayed on the image form list.
NOTE
The following two types of icons appear on the screen:
: Transparent Image
: Entire Image Composition
8
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Checking Image Form Details
1
2
3-32
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Store Form for Form Composition]
appears ➞ press [Store Form for Form Composition].
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3
Select the desired image form ➞ press [Details].
If eight or more image forms are stored, press [▼] or [▲] to display the rest of the
image forms.
NOTE
To check the images stored as forms, press [Check Print] ➞ make a copy of the
image. (See Chapter 2, “Additional Copy Functions” in the Copying Guide or
Chapter 4, “Using/Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox,” in the Mail Box
Guide.)
4
Check the detailed information ➞ press [Done].
If you want to change the name of an image form, press [Change Form Name].
NOTE
• For instructions on how to enter characters on the touch panel display. (See
“Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display,” on p. 1-43.)
• The maximum number of characters that can be entered is 24.
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3-33
Customizing Settings
3
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Erasing an Image Form
1
2
Customizing Settings
3
3
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Store Form for Form Composition]
appears ➞ press [Store Form for Form Composition].
Select the image form that you want to erase ➞ press [Erase].
NOTE
To check stored image forms, press [Check Print] ➞ make a copy of the image.
(See Chapter 2, “Additional Copy Functions,” in the Copying Guide or Chapter 4,
“Using/Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox,” in the Mail Box Guide.)
3-34
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
4
Press [Yes].
Customizing Settings
3
If you do not want to erase the image, press [No].
The image form is erased.
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass
You can set the paper size and type that the stack bypass uses beforehand. This
setting is useful if you always load the same paper size and type into the stack
bypass.
NOTE
• If you are using the stack bypass as a paper source for the Copy, Mail Box, and Receive
functions, you must select the stack bypass when setting Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS.
(See “Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching,” on p.
3-14.)
• The default setting is ‘Off’.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3-35
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Stack Bypass Standard Settings]
appears ➞ press [Stack Bypass Standard Settings].
Customizing Settings
3
3
Select [On] ➞ press [Store].
If you select [Off], proceed to step 6.
3-36
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
4
Select the desired paper size ➞ press [Next].
Customizing Settings
3
NOTE
• To select a nonstandard paper size, press [Free Size].
• To select an A or B series paper size, press [A/B-size].
5
Select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
If [Free Size] is selected, [Transparency] cannot be selected.
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3-37
6
Press [OK].
Customizing Settings
3
The selected mode is set.
7
3-38
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
Setting the Standard Local Print Settings
If you want to print documents from an inbox without changing the original settings
set when they were scanned, or if you want to print documents sent from a personal
computer after changing the print settings, you can print using the Standard Local
Print Settings set in this section. The machine also prints using the Standard Local
Print Settings when you merge multiple documents. (An asterisk (*) indicates the
default setting.)
• Paper
Select (Paper Source)
• Copies
• Finisher
- With the Finisher:
Do not Collate/Collate/Offset Collate*/Group/Offset Group/Staple (Corner
(Top Left/Bottom Left/Top Right/Bottom Right), Double (Left/Right))
- With the Finisher and Puncher Unit-B1:
Do not Collate/Collate/Offset Collate*/Group/Offset Group/Staple (Corner
(Top Left/Bottom Left/Top Right/Bottom Right), Double (Left/Right))/Hole
Punch
- With the Copy Tray-C3:
Do not Collate/Collate*/Group/Rotate Collating/Rotate Grouping
• Two-sided Print (On/Off*)
• Erase Document After Printing (On/Off*)
• Merge Documents (On/Off*)
NOTE
The default settings are:
- Paper Select: ‘Auto’
- Copies: ‘1’
- Finisher: ‘Offset Collate (with the Finisher)’, ‘Collate (with the Copy Tray-C3)’
- Two-sided Print: ‘Off’
- Erase Document After Printing: ‘Off’
- Merge Documents: ‘Off’
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3-39
Customizing Settings
3
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Standard Local Print Settings] appears
➞ press [Standard Local Print Settings].
Customizing Settings
3
3
Select the Standard Local Print Settings for each mode ➞
press [Done].
Paper Select: Select the paper source.
Copies: Set the number of copies from one to 2,000 sets.
Finisher: Set the type of collating.
Two-sided Print: Set whether to perform two-sided printing.
Erase Document After Printing: Set whether to erase a document after printing.
Merge Documents: Set whether to merge documents when you select multiple
documents.
The mode selection screen is divided into two screens. Press [▼] or [▲] ➞ select
the desired mode.
The selected mode is set.
3-40
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Changing the Display Language
You can change the language displayed on the touch panel display.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Language Switch] appears ➞ press
[Language Switch].
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3
Customizing Settings
NOTE
• The default setting is ‘Off’.
• If there is a difference between the language set on the machine and the one set on the
Active Directory, the sender’s common name is not displayed on the e-mail recipient’s
machine.
3-41
3
Press [On] ➞ select a desired language.
Customizing Settings
3
If the desired language is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲].
Press [Off], if you do not want to change the display language.
4
Press [OK].
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Basic Features screen.
NOTE
• If Language Switch is set to ‘On’, some characters are restricted and cannot be
entered. To enable all characters, perform the following steps.
- On the Language Switch Screen Display, select [Off] ➞ press [OK]
• Even if Language Switch is set to ‘On’, there are some languages that cannot be
displayed.
3-42
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
Reversing the Display Colors
You can reverse the colors on the touch panel display for better viewing. If you are
finding it hard to make out what is being shown on the display, using this function
may make things clearer.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘Off’.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞[Common Settings].
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Reversed Display (Color)] appears ➞
press [Reversed Display (Color)].
3
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
The color tone of the touch panel display is changed.
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3-43
Customizing Settings
3
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting the Offset Jobs Mode
This mode enables you to collate and output each job separately. If Offset Jobs is
set to ‘Off’, the machine outputs pages without collating.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘On’.
Customizing Settings
3
1
2
3-44
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Offset Jobs] appears ➞ press [Offset
Jobs].
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Settings
3
Select [Off], if you do not want to set the Offset Jobs mode.
The selected mode is set.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults
You can restore all of the Common Settings to their defaults (initial settings).
NOTE
If you set Language Switch to ‘On’ and then initialize the Common Settings while
switching languages, the Language Switch setting returns to the default setting of ‘Off’.
However, the displayed language remains unchanged. (See “Changing the Display
Language,” on p. 3-41.)
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3-45
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Initialize Common Settings] appears ➞
press [Initialize Common Settings].
Customizing Settings
3
3
Press [Yes].
To cancel initializing the Common Settings, press [No].
3-46
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
The message <Initialized.> appears on the display for approximately two seconds.
3
4
Customizing Settings
The Common Settings are returned to their defaults.
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting Specifications That Are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
3-47
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings)
You can set the current date and time, and specify the time it takes for the machine
to enter the Sleep mode.
NOTE
The Timer Settings screen is made up of several screens. Press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired screen, and make the required settings.
Customizing Settings
3
Setting the Current Date and Time
This enables you to set the current date and time. The set date and time also act as
a guide to set functions which require a timer.
3-48
GMT:
The time at the Greenwich Observatory in England is
referred to as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Time Zone:
The standard time zones of the world are expressed
globally in terms of the difference in hours (± up to 12
hours) from GMT (± 0 hours). A time zone is a region
throughout which the time difference is the same.
Daylight Saving Time:
In some countries, time is advanced throughout the
summer season. The period in which this is applied is
called “Daylight Saving Time.”
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings)
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Timer Settings] ➞ [Date &
Time Settings].
Customizing Settings
3
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
2
Enter the current date (month, day, year) and time using
0 - 9 (numeric keys).
Enter all four digits of the year.
Enter the date, and the time in 24-hour notation as four consecutive digits.
Examples:
May 06 ➞ 0506
7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering values, press
again, starting with the month.
C
(Clear) ➞ enter the values
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings)
3-49
● If you are setting the time zone:
❑ Press the Time Zone drop-down list➞ select the time zone where the machine
is located.
Customizing Settings
3
NOTE
• The default setting is ‘GMT-5:00’.
• Eastern time (US/Canada): GMT-5:00
• Central time (US/Canada): GMT-6:00
• Mountain time (US/Canada): GMT-7:00
• Pacific time (US/Canada): GMT-8:00
• If the desired time zone is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll through the list.
● If you are setting Daylight Saving Time:
❑ Press [On] ➞ [Start Date].
3-50
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings)
❑ Select the month and day from the Month and Day drop-down lists, as shown
below.
❑ Press [–] or [+] to set the time of day you want Daylight Saving Time to take
effect.
❑ When all the settings are complete, press [OK].
❑ Press [End Date] ➞ make the settings in the same way as [Start Date] ➞ press
[OK].
NOTE
• If you set the Daylight Saving Time, the machine automatically sets the standard
time of the machine one hour forward on the specified date and time.
• You can also set the time by pressing 0 - 9 (numeric keys).
• The Time settings can be set in one hour increments from 0 to 23 hours.
• The default setting is ‘On’. Between 2:00 a.m. on the first Sunday of April and 2:00
a.m. on the last Sunday of October.
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings)
3-51
Customizing Settings
3
3
Press [OK].
Customizing Settings
3
The selected mode is set.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing
Operations
If the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time, the
control panel power switch automatically switches OFF to save power. The machine
enters the Sleep mode.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘1 hour’.
3-52
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings)
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Timer Settings] ➞ [Auto
Sleep Time].
Customizing Settings
3
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
2
Press [▼] or [▲] to enter the desired Auto Sleep Time ➞ press
[OK].
The Auto Sleep Time settings are 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, or 50 minutes, 1 hour, 90
minutes, and 2, 3, or 4 hours (in one hour increments).
The selected mode is set.
3
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings)
3-53
Setting the Time for the Display to Return to the Basic
Features Screen after Finishing Operations
If the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time, the
display returns to the Basic Features screen (Standard setting) of the selected
function.
This time is called Auto Clear Time. The Auto Clear Time can be set from 0 to 9
minutes in one minute increments, and can also be set to ‘Off’.
NOTE
• If ‘0’ is selected, the Auto Clear Time mode is not set.
• The default setting is ‘2 minutes’.
Customizing Settings
3
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Timer Settings] ➞ [Auto
Clear Time].
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
3-54
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings)
2
Press [–] or [+] to enter the desired Auto Clear Time ➞ press
[OK].
The Auto Clear Time settings are from 0 to 9 minutes (in one minute increments).
You can also enter values using
0
-
9
(numeric keys).
The selected mode is set.
3
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting the Time for the Unit to Quiet Down after the Last
Task
This machine enters the Quiet mode after a specified amount of time has elapsed
following a print job, or after a key has been pressed. You can specify the amount of
time that elapses prior to entering the Quiet mode.
NOTE
• If ‘0’ is selected, the Quiet mode is not set.
• The default setting is ‘1 minute’.
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings)
3-55
Customizing Settings
3
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Timer Settings] ➞ [Time
Until Unit Quiets Down].
Customizing Settings
3
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
2
Press [–] or [+] to enter the desired time period ➞ press [OK].
The Time Until Unit Quiets Down settings are from 0 to 9 minutes (in one minute
increments).
You can also enter values by using
0
-
9
(numeric keys).
The selected mode is set.
3
3-56
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings)
Setting the Time for the Unit’s Power to Turn OFF on
Different Days of the Week
You can set the time that the machine automatically enters the Sleep mode each
day of the week.
NOTE
• Setting Range: Daily from Sunday to Saturday, 00:00 to 23:59 in one minute increments.
• If the Auto Sleep Time and Daily Timer modes are both set, the Auto Sleep Time setting
has priority.
• The default setting is ‘no setting’.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Timer Settings] ➞ [Daily
Timer Settings].
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings)
3-57
Customizing Settings
3
2
Select the day of the week ➞ enter the time using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
0
-
9
Customizing Settings
3
Enter the time in 24-hour notation, as four digits without a space.
Examples: 7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time, select the day of the week again ➞
enter a four digit number.
You can also press
C
(Clear) to clear the incorrect values.
The selected mode is set.
3
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting the Low-Power Mode Time
If the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time
after prints have been made or a key operation performed, the machine
automatically enters the Low-power mode. You can easily change the time it takes
for the machine to enter the Low-Power mode.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘15 minutes’.
1
3-58
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Timer Settings].
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings)
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Low-power Mode Time] appears ➞
press [Low-power Mode Time].
3
Press [▼] or [▲] to enter the Low-Power mode time ➞ press
[OK].
The Low-power Mode Time settings are: 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, or 50 minutes, 1 hour,
90 minutes, and 2, 3, or 4 hours.
The selected mode is set.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings)
3-59
Customizing Settings
3
Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning)
You can perform a fine adjustment of the printed image and stapling position.
NOTE
The Adjustment/Cleaning screen is made up of several screens. Press [▼] or [▲] to
scroll to the desired screen and make the required settings.
Making a Zoom Fine Adjustment
Customizing Settings
3
When you print a copy or document from an inbox, a slight difference in size may
occur between the size of the original image, and the size of the printed image. If
this happens, you can perform a fine adjustment to compensate for this difference.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞
[Zoom Fine Adjustment].
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
3-60
Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning)
2
Press [–] or [+] to adjust the percentage (%) ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Settings
3
The adjustment range for both the X (left-right direction) and the Y (up-down
direction) is from –1.0% to +1.0% in 0.1% increments.
The selected mode is set.
3
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Staple Repositioning for the Saddle Stitcher Unit
After a staple jam in the optional Saddle Stitcher Unit has been cleared, or the
staple cartridge is replaced, paper is fed to the unit and is stapled a few times. This
procedure makes staples immediately available for the next job.
IMPORTANT
• This function can only be set when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (optional) is attached.
• The following paper sizes can be used for this function: 11" x 17" or LTRR.
NOTE
• The required paper is fed from the paper source automatically.
• Before you perform staple repositioning, remove all of the paper in the booklet tray.
Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning)
3-61
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞
[Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning].
Customizing Settings
3
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
2
Press [Start].
To cancel staple repositioning, press [Cancel].
3
3-62
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning)
Changing the Saddle Stitch Position
When saddle stitching is being performed, and you notice that the folds of the paper
are not exactly in the middle of the booklet, you can make adjustments to the
saddle stitch position to compensate for this error.
IMPORTANT
This function can only be set if the Saddle Finisher-F2 (optional) is attached.
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞
[Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment].
3
Customizing Settings
1
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning)
3-63
2
Select the paper size for which you want to adjust during
saddle stitching.
Customizing Settings
3
NOTE
Some of the paper sizes displayed may not be available in certain countries.
3
Press [▼] or [▲] to adjust the saddle stitch position ➞ press
[OK].
The adjustment range is from –2.0 mm to +2.0 mm, in 0.25 mm increments.
The selected mode is set.
4
3-64
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning)
Adjusting the Standard Exposure
You may have to recalibrate the machine when you notice differences between the
original image and the printed image when the exposure scale is set in the middle.
NOTE
The default setting is in the middle ‘5’, on a scale from 1 to 9.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞
[Exposure Recalibration].
Customizing Settings
3
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
2
Press [Light] or [Dark] to adjust the exposure ➞ press [OK].
The selected mode is set.
Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning)
3-65
3
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Adjusting the Page Number Position
When you print documents with page numbers, you can adjust the page number
position, as shown in the illustration below.
Customizing Settings
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
NOTE
The default setting is ‘7/16" (12 mm)’.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞
[Page Number Position Adjustment].
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
3-66
Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning)
2
Press [–] or [+] to enter the desired page number position ➞
press [OK].
Customizing Settings
3
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
• If you want to enter values in millimeters, press [mm].
• When entering values in millimeters, you can use 0 C (Clear) to clear your entries.
3
9
(numeric keys), and
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning)
3-67
Report Settings
This section describes how to print various reports.
NOTE
• [Report Settings] is displayed only if the optional Network Kit or Network Multi-PDL
Printer Kit is attached.
• [Send] is only displayed if you are using the imageRUNNER 6020i/5020i.
Customizing Settings
3
Specifying Report Settings
You can specify whether to print a Send Result Report after every Send job, only
after an error occurs, or not at all. You can also specify whether an Activity Report is
printed after every 100 documents have been sent or received, or at specific times.
IMPORTANT
You cannot specify the Report Settings for MEAP applications.
Send Result Report (TX Report)
The default setting is to print a report when an error occurs. However, you can
select to print a Send Result Report after every send job, print a portion of the sent
document, or select not to print a Send Result Report.
NOTE
The default settings are:
- Send Result Report: ‘For Error Only’
- Error Copy Print: ‘On’
3-68
Report Settings
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Report Settings].
2
Press [Send] under <Settings>.
3
Press [TX Report].
Customizing Settings
3
Report Settings
3-69
4
Select [For Error Only], [On], or [Off].
Customizing Settings
3
● If you select [For Error Only] or [On]:
❑ Select [On] or [Off] for <Error Copy Print> ➞ press [OK].
[On]: The Send Result Report is printed with a portion of the original.
[Off]: The Send Result Report is printed without a portion of the outgoing
original.
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
The Send Result Report is not printed.
The selected mode is set.
5
3-70
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Report Settings
Setting the Specifications of an Activity Report
This function enables you to print a log of all Send and Receive jobs. You can select
whether to print the report after every 100 jobs (Auto Print), or at a specific time
(Daily Activity Report Time). You can print Send or Receive job logs separately. You
can also print an Activity Report manually from the System Monitor screen. (See
“Printing the Send Job Status/Log,” on p. 2-19, “Printing a Received Job Log,” on p.
2-23.)
1
Press
2
Press [Send] under <Settings>.
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Report Settings].
Report Settings
3-71
3
Customizing Settings
NOTE
• The default settings are:
- Auto Print: ‘On’
- Daily Activity Report Time: ‘Off’
- Send/Receive Separate: ‘Off’
• You cannot print an Activity Report for send and receive jobs that are specified through
MEAP applications.
3
Press [Activity Report].
4
Select [On] or [Off] for <Auto Print>.
Customizing Settings
3
[On]: Prints a report after every 100 Send/Receive jobs.
[Off]: The Activity Report is not printed.
3-72
Report Settings
5
Select [On] or [Off] for <Daily Activity Report Time>.
Customizing Settings
3
[On]: Prints reports at the specified time.
[Off]: The Daily Activity Report Time is not set.
● If you select [On]:
❑ Enter the time using
0
-
9
(numeric keys).
Enter the time in 24-hour notation, as four digits without a space.
Examples: 7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering values, enter the four digits again.
You can also press
C
(Clear) to clear the incorrect values.
Report Settings
3-73
6
Press [Send/Receive Separate] ➞ [OK].
Customizing Settings
3
If you want to print Send and Receive jobs separately, press [Send/Receive
Separate] ➞ [On].
If you do not want to print Send and Receive jobs separately, do not press [Send/
Receive Separate]. If the Send/Receive Separate mode is ‘On’, press [Send/
Receive Separate] to turn the Send/Receive Separate mode ‘Off’.
The selected mode is set.
7
3-74
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Report Settings
Printing Lists
You can print the contents of an Address Book or a list of the Additional Functions
settings.
NOTE
If plain or recycled paper (11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR) is loaded in a paper drawer that
has been set to ‘On’ when you press [Other] to select a paper source in Drawer Eligibility
for APS/ADS (from the Additional Functions screen), you can print a list. (See “Setting a
Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching,” on p. 3-14.)
Printing the Address Book List
IMPORTANT
If you select an Address Book and press [Print List], all of the destinations in the Address
Book are printed even if you are using Access Number Management for the Address
Book.
1
Press
2
Press [Send] under <Print List>.
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Report Settings].
Report Settings
3-75
3
Customizing Settings
You can print the contents of a subaddress book (Address Book 1 to 10 or Onetouch Buttons). This function is useful if you wish to see the address details.
3
Press [Address Book List].
Customizing Settings
3
4
3-76
Select an Address Book (from 1 to 10) or [One-touch Buttons]
to print ➞ press [Print List].
Report Settings
5
Press [Yes].
Customizing Settings
3
If you do not want to print the list, press [No].
The selected address book list is printed.
6
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Report Settings
3-77
Printing the Additional Functions Settings List
You can print a list of the current Additional Functions settings.
NOTE
The Additional Functions settings are:
- Send: Prints all settings related to sending functions that were set from the Additional
Functions screen
- Network: Prints all settings related to network functions that were set from the
Additional Functions screen
Customizing Settings
3
1
Press
2
Press [Send] or [Network] under <Print List>.
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Report Settings].
In this example, [Send] is selected.
3
3-78
Press [User’s Data List].
Report Settings
4
Press [Yes].
Customizing Settings
3
If you do not want to print the User’s Data List, press [No].
The selected User’s Data List is printed.
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Report Settings
3-79
Customizing Settings
3
3-80
Report Settings
System Manager Settings
4
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the settings that can be made by the person in charge of machine
operations, such as the System Manager.
Specifying the System Manager Settings (System Manager Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Storing the Department ID, Password, and Impression Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Changing the Password and Impression Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Erasing the Department ID and Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Checking and Printing Counter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Erasing Print Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Setting to Accept Print Jobs with an Unknown ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
E-mail/I-Fax Send Settings (E-mail/I-Fax Settings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Memory RX Inbox Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Specifying the Settings for the Remote UI (Remote UI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50
Setting Access Restriction to an Address Book (Manage/Access to Address Book) . .4-52
Setting a Password for an Address Book (Address Book Password) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52
Setting Access Number Management for an Address Book
(Access Number Management) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54
Setting Device Information (Device Information Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58
Storing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58
Storing Forwarding Destinations When the Forwarding Conditions Do Not Match . . . . . . . . . .4-74
Checking/Changing Forwarding Setting Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-82
Forwarding Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-83
Deleting a Forwarding Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85
Printing a Forwarding Settings List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86
Erasing a Message Board (Clear Message Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88
Auto Online/Offline (Auto Online/Offline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90
Setting Auto Online (Auto Online) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90
Setting Auto Offline (Auto Offline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91
Setting MEAP Settings (MEAP Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-93
Setting Use HTTP Server (Use HTTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-93
Printing Installed Applications’ Information (Print System Information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-95
LDAP Server Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-97
4-1
4. System Manager Settings
Registering an LDAP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Changing an LDAP Server Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Deleting an LDAP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Printing LDAP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
System Manager Settings
4
4-2
Specifying the System Manager Settings
(System Manager Settings)
IMPORTANT
• Attaching the optional Card Reader-C1 erases the System Manager ID and password
that have already been stored.
• Depending on the login services you set, if Department ID Management is set to ‘Off’ and
System Manager is not specified, all of the users may be considered as Administrators
without authentication.
4
NOTE
• If the optional Card Reader-C1 is attached, cards to which number 1 to 1,000 have been
assigned, cannot be used when registering the System Manager ID.
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see “Entering Characters from the Touch
Panel Display,” on p. 1-43.
• The maximum number of characters you can assign for a name, contact, or comment is
32, and 64 for an e-mail address.
• The maximum number of digits you can store for the System Manager ID and password
is seven. If you enter fewer than seven digits for either setting, the machine stores them
with leading zeros.
- Example: If <321> is entered, it is stored as <0000321>.
System Manager Settings
You can set an ID and a password for the System Manager. If the System Manager
ID/password is set, restrictions can be placed on storing or changing the System
Settings.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[System Manager Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
Specifying the System Manager Settings (System Manager Settings)
4-3
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
2
Press [System Manager ID] ➞ enter a number (up to seven
digits) using 0 - 9 (numeric keys).
System Manager Settings
4
You must set a System Manager ID in order to manage the operations of the
machine.
You cannot store a System Manager ID with only zeros as the number, such as
<0000000>.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering a number, press
number.
4-4
Specifying the System Manager Settings (System Manager Settings)
C
(Clear) to clear the entire
Press [System Password] ➞ enter a number (up to seven
digits) using 0 - 9 (numeric keys).
4
You cannot store a System Password with only zeros as the number, such as
<0000000>.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the password, press
password.
4
C
(Clear) to clear the
Press [System Manager] ➞ enter the name of the System
Manager ➞ press [OK].
Specifying the System Manager Settings (System Manager Settings)
4-5
System Manager Settings
3
5
Press [E-mail Address] ➞ enter the e-mail address of the
System Manager ➞ press [OK].
6
Press [Contact Information] ➞ enter the contact information
for the System Manager ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
4
4-6
Specifying the System Manager Settings (System Manager Settings)
7
Press [Comment] ➞ enter a comment for the System Manager
➞ press [OK].
8
System Manager Settings
4
Once you have completed all the settings, press [OK].
To cancel storing the System Manager Settings, press [Cancel].
The display returns to the Basic Features screen.
Specifying the System Manager Settings (System Manager Settings)
4-7
Setting Department ID Management
(Dept. ID Management)
By storing a Department ID and password for each department, you can set the
machine so that its functions can be used only after the correct password has been
entered. This is called Department ID Management. Department IDs and
passwords for up to 1,000 departments can be stored. Use Department ID
Management to manage and check the print totals for each department.
With Department ID Management, the following settings can be specified:
• Specifying
the use of Department ID Management
• Storing the Department ID, password, and Impression Limit
• Setting Function Restrictions
• Setting Print Restrictions
System Manager Settings
4
IMPORTANT
• If the Card Reader-C1 (optional) is attached, and SDL and Default Authentication are set
for login service, Department ID Management is automatically activated. (See “Card
Reader-C1,” on p. 7-47.)
• If SDL or SSO is set as a login service, Department ID Management is performed on the
Department ID, which shares the same user name and password with the MEAP User
Authentication.
• If SDL or SSO is set as a login service, the Limit Functions is not available.
• If SDL is set as a login service, the registered information in SDL and the registered user
data and password in Department ID Management of the machine must be matched.
• You can set Department ID Management from a web browser where you used the user
information editing function of SDL.
• If SSO is set as the login service, NetSpot Accountant is necessary to manage the print
totals of each user. (The machine cannot count the print totals using Department ID
Management.)
NOTE
• The maximum number of digits you can store for the Department ID and password is
seven. If you enter fewer than seven digits for either setting, the machine stores them
with leading zeros.
- Example: If <321> is entered ➞ <0000321> is stored
• The default setting is ‘Off’.
• This machine enables you to manage the user information other than Department ID
Management, by utilizing SDL (Simple Device Login) and SSO (Single Sign-On).
4-8
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
Storing the Department ID, Password, and Impression
Limit
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Dept.
ID Management].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
2
Select whether to use Department ID Management.
● If you select [On]:
❑ To store the Department ID and password, press [Store Dept. ID/Password] ➞
proceed to step 3.
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
4-9
System Manager Settings
4
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK] ➞ [Done].
The display returns to the Additional Functions screen.
3
Press [Store].
System Manager Settings
4
4
Press [Dept. ID] ➞ enter the Department ID using
(numeric keys).
0
-
9
You cannot store a Department ID with only zeros as the number, such as
<0000000>.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering a number, press
number.
4-10
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
C
(Clear) to clear the entire
Press [Password] ➞ enter a password using
keys).
0
-
9
(numeric
You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.
NOTE
If you do not want to set a password, you can use the machine by only entering the
Department ID.
6
If you want to set a page limit restriction, press [Impression
Limit] ➞ enter the impression limit using 0 - 9 (numeric
keys).
The Impression Limit range is from 0 to 999,999. You cannot print more than the
set number of impressions.
NOTE
• The Impression Limit denotes the number of surfaces that are printed. If you print
on both sides of a sheet, the print is counted as two impressions.
• If you make a mistake when entering a number, press C (Clear) to clear the entire
number.
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
4-11
4
System Manager Settings
5
System Manager Settings
4
4-12
7
Press [OK].
8
Press [Limit Functions].
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
9
Select [On] or [Off] next to the functions you want to limit
using Department ID Management ➞ press [OK].
4
System Manager Settings
If you select [Off] for all of the functions on the screen, Department ID
Management is set only for copying or printing operations from computers.
10 Press [Limit Impressions] to set print restrictions ➞ press
[Done].
This validates the Impression Limit set in step 6.
NOTE
• You must specify an Impression Limit in step 6 in order for [Limit Impressions] to be
effective.
• The Impression Limit cannot be set for each department.
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
4-13
4
If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID
Management.
System Manager Settings
11 Press [OK].
The selected mode is set.
12 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
If the screen below appears, enter the Department ID and password.
NOTE
For instructions on how to enter the Department ID and Password, see “Entering
the Department ID and Password,” on p. 1-48.
4-14
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
Changing the Password and Impression Limit
The following instructions describe how to change the password and impression
limit settings of the stored Department ID.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Dept.
ID Management].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
System Manager Settings
2
4
Press [On] ➞ [Store Dept. ID/Password].
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
4-15
3
Press [▼] or [▲] to display the department whose password
you want to change ➞ select the department ➞ press [Edit].
4
System Manager Settings
4
Use 0 - 9 (numeric keys) to enter the new password (up to
seven digits) and the impression limit.
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter the password.
❑ Press [Impression Limit] ➞ enter the new impression limit ➞ press [OK].
You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.
The Impression Limit range is from 0 to 999,999. You cannot print more than the
set limit number of impressions.
NOTE
• You cannot change Department IDs.
• If you make a mistake when entering a number, press
number.
4-16
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
C
(Clear) to clear the entire
5
Press [Done].
6
Press [OK].
System Manager Settings
4
If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID
Management.
The selected mode is set.
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
4-17
7
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
If the screen below appears, enter the Department ID and password.
System Manager Settings
4
NOTE
For instructions on how to enter the Department ID and password, see “Entering
the Department ID and Password,” on p. 1-48.
Erasing the Department ID and Password
The following instructions describe how to erase a Department ID and password
that you have stored.
NOTE
You cannot erase a Department ID if the Department ID is managed by the optional Card
Reader-C1.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Dept.
ID Management].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
4-18
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
3
Press [On] ➞ [Store Dept. ID/Password].
4
Press [▼] or [▲] to display the Department ID that you want to
erase ➞ select the Department ID ➞ press [Erase].
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
4-19
System Manager Settings
2
4
Press [Yes].
To cancel erasing, press [No].
4
System Manager Settings
The selected Department ID and all of its settings are erased.
5
4-20
Press [Done].
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
6
Press [OK].
If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID
Management.
System Manager Settings
7
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
If the screen below appears, enter the Department ID and password.
NOTE
For instructions on how to enter the Department ID and password, see “Entering
the Department ID and Password,” on p. 1-48.
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
4-21
Checking and Printing Counter Information
You can display and print a list of how much paper was used by each department.
NOTE
• If a MEAP authentication application is being used, you can check the number of print
totals for the Department IDs that correspond to registered users.
• For instructions on how to register users in a MEAP authentication application, see the
MEAP SMS Administrator Guide.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Dept.
ID Management].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
System Manager Settings
4
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
2
4-22
Press [On] ➞ [Print Totals].
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
3
Check or print the print totals.
The print totals that belong to an entry without a Department ID (left blank) are
the number of prints from computers that do not correspond with a stored
Department ID (unknown ID).
● If you only want to check the counter:
❑ Press [ ▼] or [▲] to display the desired Department ID ➞ check the print totals.
System Manager Settings
4
● If you want to print the displayed list:
❑ Press [Print List] ➞ [Yes].
If you do not want to print the displayed list, press [No].
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
4-23
The screen below appears during printing.
4
To close the screen, press [Done].
System Manager Settings
To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
NOTE
If plain or recycled paper (11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR) is loaded in a paper
drawer that has been set to ‘On’ when you press [Other] to select a paper source in
Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS (from the Additional Functions screen), you can
print a list. (See “Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer
Switching,” on p. 3-14.)
4
4-24
Press [Done].
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
5
Press [OK].
If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID
Management.
System Manager Settings
6
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
If the screen below appears, enter the Department ID and password.
NOTE
For instructions on how to enter the Department ID and password, see “Entering
the Department ID and Password,” on p. 1-48.
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
4-25
Erasing Print Totals
The following instructions describe how to erase the print totals for all departments.
It is also possible to erase the print totals for specific departments.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Dept.
ID Management].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
System Manager Settings
4
2
4-26
Press [On] ➞ [Print Totals].
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
● If you want to erase the print totals for one specific department:
❑ Select the department whose print totals you want to erase ➞ press [Clear].
4
● If you want to erase all counts:
3
System Manager Settings
❑ Press [Clear All Totals].
Press [Yes].
If you do not want to erase the copy counts, press [No].
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
4-27
The message <Erased.> appears on the touch panel display for approximately
three seconds.
4
System Manager Settings
4
4-28
Press [Done].
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
5
Press [OK].
If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID
Management.
System Manager Settings
6
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
If the screen below appears, enter the Department ID and password.
NOTE
For instructions on how to enter the Department ID and password, see “Entering
the Department ID and Password,” on p. 1-48.
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
4-29
Setting to Accept Print Jobs with an Unknown ID
You can decide whether to print documents from a computer that does not
correspond with a stored Department ID.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘On’.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Dept.
ID Management].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
4
System Manager Settings
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
2
Press [On].
If you select [On], Department ID Management is enabled. (See “Entering the
Department ID and Password,” on p. 1-48.)
4-30
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
Select [On] or [Off] for <Accept Jobs with Unknown ID> ➞
press [OK].
[On]: The machine outputs prints from computers that do not correspond with a
stored Department ID.
[Off]: The machine does not output prints from computers that do not
correspond with a stored Department ID.
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID Management.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
If the screen below appears, enter the Department ID and password.
NOTE
For instructions on how to enter the Department ID and password, see “Entering
the Department ID and Password,” on p. 1-48.
Setting Department ID Management (Dept. ID Management)
4-31
4
System Manager Settings
3
Specifying the Communications Settings
(Communications Settings)
This enables you to specify e-mail, I-fax, and Memory RX Inbox settings.
NOTE
• [Communications Settings] can only be set if you are using the imageRUNNER 6020i/
5020i.
• You cannot set Communications Settings if you are using MEAP applications.
E-mail/I-Fax Send Settings (E-mail/I-Fax Settings)
4
System Manager Settings
This function enables you to: set the maximum data size for sending an e-mail
message and I-fax, store a default subject name if you forget to specify one, set the
TX Timeout for sending an I-fax in the Full mode, set whether to print an e-mail
notification report received from other machines regarding a sent Full Mode I-fax,
and set an RX error notice.
■ Maximum Data Size For Sending
You can set the maximum data size for outgoing e-mail messages and I-fax documents. If
the size of a Send job exceeds this limit, the e-mail message is divided into several e-mail
messages, and then sent. I-Fax transmissions that exceed the data size limit are handled
as errors, and are not sent.
■ Default Subject
You can store a default subject name if you forget to specify one when sending a job.
■ Full Mode TX Timeout
You can set the time that elapses before sending operations terminate (automatically) if
you do not receive a notification e-mail (MDN) from the recipient informing you that a job
you sent using the Full Mode was received at the other end.
■ Print MDN (Message Disposition Notification)/DSN (Delivery Status
Notification) on Receipt
You can set whether to print an e-mail notice to inform you that the job was received when
you send an I-fax using the Full Mode.
■ Always Send Notice for RX Errors
You can set whether to inform the sender if an error occurs while an e-mail message or
I-fax is being sent.
4-32
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings)
■ Use Send Via Server
You can set whether to use the Send Via Server setting when specifying destination
conditions for I-fax sending. If you want to set Send Via Server to ‘On ’ or ‘Off’, it is
necessary to set Use Send Via Server to ‘On’ beforehand.
NOTE
The default settings are as follows:
- Maximum Data Size For Sending: ‘3 MB’
- Default Subject: ‘Attached Image’
- Full Mode TX Timeout: ‘24 hours’
- Print MDN/DSN on Receipt: ‘Off’
- Always send notice for RX errors: ‘On’
- Use Send Via Server: ‘Off’
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
4
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
2
Press [Communications Settings] ➞ [E-mail/I-Fax Settings].
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings)
4-33
System Manager Settings
1
3
Set the Maximum Data Size For Sending.
❑ Press [Maximum Data Size For Sending].
❑ Press [–] or [+] to specify the maximum data size for sending.
System Manager Settings
4
You can set the Maximum Data Size for Sending from 0 to 99 MB in 1 MB
increments.
You can also use
your entries.
0
-
9
(numeric keys) to enter values, and
C
(Clear) to clear
IMPORTANT
The maximum data size for sending must not be greater than the maximum data
size of the mail server. Contact your System Administrator for details.
NOTE
• If you enter ‘0 MB’ as the data size, there is no size limit on the data that is sent.
You can send messages without limiting the data size.
• The data size limit can be set in 1 MB increments. If the size of an e-mail message
exceeds the set limit, the e-mail message is split up by page and sent out as
smaller e-mail messages, each of which is within the set limit. I-fax data that
exceeds the set limit is handled as an error, and is not sent.
4-34
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings)
Press [Subject].
5
Enter the default subject ➞ press [OK].
4
System Manager Settings
4
NOTE
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see “Entering Characters from the
Touch Panel Display,” on p. 1-43.
• The maximum number of characters you can enter for the default subject is 40.
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings)
4-35
6
Set the Full Mode TX Timeout.
❑ Press [Full Mode TX Timeout].
❑ Press [–] or [+] to specify the Full Mode TX Timeout time.
System Manager Settings
4
You can set the Full Mode TX Timeout time from 1 to 99 hours in one hour
increments.
You can also use
your entries.
7
0
-
9
(numeric keys) to enter values, and
C
(Clear) to clear
Select [On] or [Off] for <Print MDN/DSN on Receipt>.
[On]: Prints an e-mail reception notice when the machine receives MDN/DSN
mail.
[Off]: Does not print an e-mail reception notice when the machine receives MDN/
DSN mail.
4-36
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings)
Select [On] or [Off] for <Always send notice for RX errors>.
[On]: If an error occurs, the sender is always informed of the details of the error.
[Off]: If an error occurs, the sender is not informed of the details of the error.
9
Select [On] or [Off] for <Use Send Via Server> ➞ press [OK].
[On]: Enables you to use the Send Via Server setting when specifying destination
conditions for I-fax sending.
[Off]: Does not enable you to use the Send Via Server setting when specifying
destination conditions for I-fax sending.
The selected mode is set.
10 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings)
4-37
4
System Manager Settings
8
Memory RX Inbox Settings
This enables you to store the Memory RX Inbox password and set a time range for
storing received documents into memory.
Setting the Memory RX Inbox Password
This enables you to enter a seven digit password for the Memory RX Inbox to
restrict its use to only those users who know the password.
NOTE
• The maximum number of digits you can store for the password is seven. If you enter
fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
- Example: If <321> is entered ➞ <0000321> is stored.
• The default setting is ‘Off’.
System Manager Settings
4
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
2
4-38
Press [Memory RX Inbox Settings] ➞ [Memory RX Inbox
Password].
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings)
Enter a password using
0
-
9
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
If you do not want to set a password, do not enter any values.
You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the password, press
entry.
4
C
(Clear) to clear your
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings)
4-39
4
System Manager Settings
3
Storing Received I-Fax Documents in Memory
This enables you to store documents received by I-fax in memory without printing
them. This is referred to as Memory Lock. You can print/send the documents from
memory after checking the relevant Memory RX Inbox.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘Off’.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
4
System Manager Settings
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
2
4-40
Press [Memory RX Inbox Settings] ➞ [Use I-Fax Memory
Lock].
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings)
3
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
If you do not want to set the I-Fax Memory Lock mode, select [Off].
4
IMPORTANT
If the message <I-Fax Memory RX is on.> does not appear, set I-Fax Memory Lock
on the Memory RX Inbox screen from the Inbox Selection screen of the Mail Box
function to ‘On’. (See Chapter 3, “Storing Received Documents in Inboxes,” in the
Mail Box Guide.)
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Memory Lock Start Time Settings
You can set Memory Lock to start automatically at a specified time.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘Off’.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings)
4-41
System Manager Settings
The selected mode is set.
2
Press [Memory RX Inbox Settings] ➞ [Memory Lock Start
Time].
4
System Manager Settings
3
4-42
Select [Everyday], [Select Days], or [Off].
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings)
● If you select [Everyday]:
❑ Select a number ([1] to [5]) ➞ enter the start time using
0
-
9
(numeric keys)
➞ press [OK].
Enter the time in 24-hour notation as four digits without a space.
Examples: 7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering values, enter the four digits again.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, press
C
(Clear) to clear your entry.
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings)
4-43
System Manager Settings
4
You can store up to five different start times.
● If you select [Select Days]:
❑ Select the day of the week from [Sun] to [Sat] ➞ select a number ([1] to [5]) ➞
enter the start time using
4
0
-
9
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
You can store up to five different start times for each day of the week.
Enter the time in 24-hour notation as four digits without a space.
Examples: 7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering values, enter the four digits again.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, press
4-44
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings)
C
(Clear) to clear your entry.
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
You can select [Everyday] for Memory Lock Start Time, and [Select Days] for
Memory Lock End Time and vice versa.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings)
4-45
4
System Manager Settings
Memory Lock will not automatically turn on at a specified time. You can
manually turn Memory Lock On or Off by pressing [On] or [Off] under <I-Fax
Memory Lock> on the Memory RX Inbox screen from the Inbox Selection
screen of the Mail Box function. (See Chapter 3, “Storing Received
Documents in Inboxes,” in the Mail Box Guide.)
Memory Lock End Time Settings
You can set Memory Lock to end automatically at a specified time.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘Off’.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
System Manager Settings
4
2
4-46
Press [Memory RX Inbox Settings] ➞ [Memory Lock End
Time].
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings)
Select [Everyday], [Select Days], or [Off].
4
● If you select [Everyday]:
❑ Select a number ([1] to [5]) ➞ enter the end time using
0
-
9
(numeric keys)
➞ press [OK].
You can store up to five different end times.
Enter the time in 24-hour notation as four digits without a space.
Examples: 7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering values, enter the four digits again.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, press
C
(Clear) to clear your entry.
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings)
4-47
System Manager Settings
3
● If you select [Select Days]:
❑ Select the day of the week from [Sun] to [Sat] ➞ select a number ([1] to [5]) ➞
enter the end time using
4
0
-
9
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
You can store up to five different end times for each day of the week.
Enter the time in 24-hour notation as four digits without a space.
Examples: 7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering values, enter the four digits again.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, press
4-48
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings)
C
(Clear) to clear your entry.
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
You can select [Everyday] for Memory Lock Start Time, and [Select Days] for
Memory Lock End Time and vice versa.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Specifying the Communications Settings (Communications Settings)
4-49
4
System Manager Settings
Memory Lock will not automatically turn off at a specified time. You can
manually turn Memory Lock On or Off by pressing [On] or [Off] under <I-Fax
Memory Lock> on the Memory RX Inbox screen from the Inbox Selection
screen of the Mail Box function. (See Chapter 3, “Storing Received
Documents in Inboxes,” in the Mail Box Guide.)
Specifying the Settings for the Remote UI
(Remote UI)
You can set whether the machine’s settings can be specified through the Remote
UI.
NOTE
• For details on the Remote UI, see the Remote UI Guide.
• The default setting is ‘On’.
1
System Manager Settings
4
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Remote UI].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
4-50
Specifying the Settings for the Remote UI (Remote UI)
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
[On]: Settings can be specified through the Remote UI.
4
[Off]: Settings cannot be specified through the Remote UI.
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
Turn the power OFF after setting this mode. The setting is only valid after the main
power of the machine is turned back ON.
3
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Specifying the Settings for the Remote UI (Remote UI)
4-51
System Manager Settings
2
Setting Access Restriction to an Address Book
(Manage/Access to Address Book)
You can set the Address Book with a password and set access numbers to restrict
its use.
NOTE
• [Manage/Access to Address Book] can only be set if you are using the imageRUNNER
6020i/5020i.
• You cannot set Address Book Settings if you are using MEAP applications.
System Manager Settings
4
Setting a Password for an Address Book
(Address Book Password)
You can set a password for an address book. If a password is set, restrictions can
be placed on storing, editing, or erasing destinations.
NOTE
The maximum number of digits you can store for the password is seven. If you enter
fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
- Example: When <321> is entered ➞ <0000321> is stored.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
4-52
Setting Access Restriction to an Address Book (Manage/Access to Address Book)
2
Press [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Address Book
Password].
3
Enter the password using
[OK].
0
-
9
System Manager Settings
4
(numeric keys) ➞ press
If you do not want to set a password, do not enter any values.
You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the password, press
entry.
4
C
(Clear) to clear your
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting Access Restriction to an Address Book (Manage/Access to Address Book)
4-53
Setting Access Number Management for an Address Book
(Access Number Management)
You can restrict the display of each address by registering an access number when
storing the address in an address book.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘Off’.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
4
System Manager Settings
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
2
4-54
Press [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access Number
Management].
Setting Access Restriction to an Address Book (Manage/Access to Address Book)
3
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
If you do not want to set an access number, select [Off].
4
4
System Manager Settings
The selected mode is set.
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting Access Restriction to an Address Book (Manage/Access to Address Book)
4-55
Setting Device Information (Device Information Settings)
Device Information Settings enable you to set the name of this machine, and the
place where it is located.
NOTE
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see “Entering Characters from the Touch
Panel Display,” on p. 1-43.
• The maximum number of characters which can be entered is 32.
4
System Manager Settings
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Device Information Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
4-56
Setting Device Information (Device Information Settings)
2
Enter the name and location of this machine.
❑ Press [Device Name] ➞ enter the name of this machine ➞ press [OK].
❑ Press [Location] ➞ enter the place where this machine is located ➞ press
[OK].
❑ Press [OK].
System Manager Settings
4
To cancel storing the Device Information, press [Cancel].
The selected mode is set.
3
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting Device Information (Device Information Settings)
4-57
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
You can store received I-fax documents in Confidential Fax Inboxes and forward
them to other machines, or file servers. This machine enables you to forward
documents that meet predetermined conditions to a specified destination. This
section explains the conditions for forwarding, and how to store, change, and erase
forwarding destinations.
NOTE
• [Forwarding Settings] can only be set if you are using the imageRUNNER 6020i/5020i.
• The maximum number of forwarding settings that you can store is 150.
• You cannot use the forwarding function if you are using MEAP applications.
System Manager Settings
4
Storing Forwarding Settings
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Forwarding Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
4-58
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
3
Press [Store].
4
To recall the forwarding settings of a received document that
you have stored, press [1 Before], [2 Before], or [3 Before].
You can recall the last three forwarding settings.
The recalled forwarding settings are displayed.
IMPORTANT
• The forwarding settings are stored in memory if you press [OK] on the Store screen
or the Edit screen.
• Identical forwarding settings are stored only once in memory.
NOTE
• The three most recent forwarding settings that were stored in memory are not
erased even when the power is turned OFF.
• The forwarding settings of a received document that were not stored in memory are
not displayed even when you press the recall keys.
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
4-59
System Manager Settings
2
System Manager Settings
4
4
Press [Condition Name].
5
Enter a name for the forwarding condition ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see “Entering Characters from the
Touch Panel Display,” on p. 1-43.
• The maximum number of characters you can enter for the condition name is 50.
• The first 24 characters of the entered condition name are also stored as the Send
Doc. Name. However, you can change the Send Doc. Name.
4-60
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
7
Press [Forwarding Conditions].
Select conditions from the To drop-down list ➞ press [Set.].
Select conditions from the From and Subject drop-down lists
in the same way.
The available forwarding conditions are:
[disregarded]:
[equals]:
[differs from]:
[begins with]:
[ends with]:
[contains]:
[does not contain]:
Disregards the To, From, or Subject information as
forwarding conditions.
Forwards the document if the From or Subject information
matches all of the characters entered.
Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject
information differs from the characters entered.
Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject
information begins with the characters entered.
Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject
information ends with the characters entered.
Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject
information contains the characters entered.
Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject
information does not contain the characters entered.
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
4-61
4
System Manager Settings
6
8
Enter the forwarding criteria ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, repeat this step for the other drop-down list.
4
System Manager Settings
If you want to change the criteria for the forwarding conditions without changing
the forwarding condition for the To, From, and Subject drop-down lists, press
[Set.] next to the desired criteria ➞ enter the new criteria ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
• If [disregarded] is selected, you cannot enter any criteria.
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see “Entering Characters from the
Touch Panel Display,” on p. 1-43.
• The maximum number of characters you can enter for the To, From, and Subject
criteria is 128.
• If you select a Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination, set the
conditions as follows:
- To: [disregarded]
- From: [equals]
- Subject: [disregarded]
4-62
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
Press [Done].
10 Press [Forwarding Destination] ➞ select [Address Book] or
[Conf. Fax Inbox].
[Address Book]: Select to forward the received document to another machine
(relay function).
[Conf. Fax Inbox]: Select to store the received document in a Confidential Fax
Inbox.
NOTE
• If you specify a group address that includes user inboxes as destinations, the
documents are not forwarded to those inboxes.
• You cannot select [Conf. Fax Inbox] if you do not set the forwarding conditions as
follows:
- To: [disregarded]
- From: [equals]
- Subject: [disregarded]
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
4-63
4
System Manager Settings
9
● If you select [Address Book]:
❑ Select the forwarding destination ➞ press [OK].
4
System Manager Settings
If Access Number Management for an Address Book is set to ‘On’, press
[Access Number] ➞ enter the access number using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞
specify the destination ➞ press [OK]. If you do not want to specify an access
number, press [No Access Number]. (See Chapter 4, “Registering/Editing
Address Book Settings,” in the Sending Guide.)
Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries.
If the desired destination is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired destination.
Press the Type drop-down list to restrict the type of addresses displayed in the
list.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books
(1 to 10 or One-touch Buttons). The subaddress books categorize the
addresses stored in the Address Book.
You cannot select multiple destinations.
NOTE
• To cancel the specified destination, select the destination again.
• To view more detailed information about an address, press [Details].
• To be able to select a forwarding destination, it is necessary to register addresses
in the Address Book beforehand. (See Chapter 4, “Registering/Editing Address
Book Settings,” in the Sending Guide.)
4-64
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
● If you select [Conf. Fax Inbox]:
If the desired inbox is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
inbox.
4
You cannot select multiple Confidential Fax Inboxes.
System Manager Settings
❑ Select the desired Confidential Fax Inbox ➞ press [OK].
IMPORTANT
You cannot select a Confidential Fax Inbox that is already set with forwarding
conditions.
11 Press [Send Doc. Name].
If a Confidential Fax Inbox is selected as a forwarding destination, this procedure
is not necessary. Proceed to step 12.
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
4-65
4
The condition name is automatically entered as the document’s name by default.
However, you can change this name.
System Manager Settings
12 Enter the name of the document ➞ press [OK].
You can also enter values using
0
-
9
(numeric keys).
NOTE
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see “Entering Characters from the
Touch Panel Display,” on p. 1-43.
• The maximum number of characters you can enter for the Document Name is 24.
13 Press [Forwarding Time].
4-66
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
14 Select [Everyday], [Select Days], or [Off].
IMPORTANT
The start time and end time cannot be set with the same time.
System Manager Settings
4
● If you select [Everyday].
❑ Enter the start time and the end time using
0
-
9
(numeric keys) ➞ press
[OK].
You can set the start time and end time from 00:00 to 23:59.
Enter the time in 24-hour notation, as four digits without space.
Examples: 7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you want to specify the entire day, enter ‘00:00’ as the start time, and ‘23:59’
as the end time.
The forwarding time is set.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, press
and enter another four digit number.
C
(Clear) to clear your entry,
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
4-67
● If you select [Select Days].
❑ Select a day of the week ([Sun] to [Sat]).
❑ Enter the start time and end time for the selected day using
0
-
9
(numeric
keys) ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
4
You can set the start time and end time from 00:00 to 23:59.
Enter the time in 24-hour notation, as four digits without space.
Examples: 7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you press [All Day], the start and end time for the selected day of the week
are automatically set to ‘00:00’ and ‘23:59’ respectively.
The forwarding time is set.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, press
and enter another four digit number.
● If you select [Off].
❑ Press [OK].
The forwarding time is not set.
4-68
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
C
(Clear) to clear your entry,
15 Press the File Type drop-down list ➞ select the file format of
the document you want to forward.
File Types:
• TIFF: Forwards images in the TIFF format.
• PDF: Inserts multiple images into a single PDF file. Received images can be
forwarded in the PDF format.
NOTE
• To view a TIFF file, a software application that supports the TIFF file formats (such
as Imaging for Windows) is required.
• To view a PDF file, Adobe Acrobat Reader is required.
16 Select whether to divide images and place them on separate
pages.
If you want to separate multiple images and place them on separate pages, and
forward them as separate files, set Divide into Pages to ‘On’.
If you want to forward multiple images as a single file without dividing them, set
Divide into Pages to ‘Off’.
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
4-69
System Manager Settings
4
If an I-fax address or Confidential Fax Inbox is selected as a forwarding
destination, this procedure is not necessary.
17 Press the Store/Print Received Doc. drop-down list ➞ select
[On] or [Off].
4
System Manager Settings
If a Confidential Fax Inbox is selected as the forwarding destination, this step is
not necessary.
If [On] is selected, the received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox or
printed.
If [Off] is selected, the received document is not stored in the Memory RX Inbox
or printed.
NOTE
If Store/Print Received Doc. is set to ‘On’ and Memory Lock is set to ‘On’, the
received document is saved in the Memory RX Inbox. If Store/Print Received Doc.
is set to ‘On’ and Memory Lock is set to ‘Off’, the received document is printed.
(See “Storing Received I-Fax Documents in Memory,” on p. 4-40, and Chapter 2,
“Receiving a Document,” in the Sending Guide.)
4-70
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
18 Press [Forwarding Done Notice].
19 Select the destination where the forwarding done notice is to
System Manager Settings
be sent ➞ press [OK].
If a Confidential Fax Inbox is selected as a forwarding destination, this step is not
necessary.
If Access Number Management for an Address Book is set to ‘On’, press
[Access Number] ➞ enter the access number using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞
specify the destination ➞ press [OK]. If you do not want to specify an access
number, press [No Access Number]. (See Chapter 4, “Registering/Editing
Address Book Settings,” in the Sending Guide.)
Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries.
If the desired destination is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired destination.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books
(subaddress books 1 to 10 or One-touch Buttons). Subaddress books categorize
the addresses stored in the Address Book.
You cannot select multiple destinations.
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
4
4-71
NOTE
• To cancel the specified destination, select the destination again.
• To view more detailed information on an address, press [Details].
• To be able to select a destination for the forwarding done notice, it is necessary to
register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See Chapter 4,
“Registering/Editing Address Book Settings,” in the Sending Guide.)
20 Select whether to check [Notice Only for Errors].
System Manager Settings
4
If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent only when an error occurs,
press [Notice Only for Errors].
If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent every time a received
document is forwarded, do not press [Notice Only for Errors].
21 Press [OK].
The selected mode is set.
IMPORTANT
You cannot set to forward the same document to multiple Confidential Fax Inboxes
simultaneously.
4-72
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
22 If necessary, press the E-mail Priority drop-down list ➞ select
a priority for your forwarded e-mail messages.
23 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
4
System Manager Settings
This setting is only necessary if the forwarding destination is an e-mail address.
4-73
Storing Forwarding Destinations When the Forwarding
Conditions Do Not Match
You can store the forwarding destinations of a received document if the forwarding
settings of the received document are not registered, or if the received document
does not match all of the forwarding conditions that you have specified.
NOTE
• Forwarding destinations can be stored one at a time, according to the Receive Type of
the received document.
• A Confidential Fax Inbox cannot be specified as a forwarding destination when
forwarding destinations do not match the forwarding conditions.
4
System Manager Settings
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Forwarding Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
4-74
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
2
Press [Forward w/o Conditions].
3
Press [Forwarding Destination].
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
System Manager Settings
4
4-75
4
Select the forwarding destination ➞ press [OK].
If Access Number Management for an Address Book is set to ‘On’, press
[Access Number] ➞ enter the access number using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞
specify the destination ➞ press [OK]. If you do not want to specify an access
number, press [No Access Number]. (See Chapter 4, “Registering/Editing
Address Book Settings,” in the Sending Guide.)
System Manager Settings
4
Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries.
If the desired destination is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired destination.
Press the Type drop-down list to restrict the type of addresses displayed in the
list.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books
(subaddress books 1 to 10 or One-touch Buttons). Subaddress books
categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book.
You cannot select multiple destinations.
NOTE
• To cancel the specified destination, select the destination again.
• To view more detailed information on an address, press [Details].
• To be able to select a forwarding destination, it is necessary to register destinations
in the Address Book beforehand. (See Chapter 4, “Registering/Editing Address
Book Settings,” in the Sending Guide.)
4-76
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
Press [Send Doc. Name].
6
Enter the name of the document ➞ press [OK].
You can also enter values using
C (Clear) to clear your entry.
0
-
9
4
System Manager Settings
5
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
NOTE
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see “Entering Characters from the
Touch Panel Display,” on p. 1-43.
• The maximum number of characters you can enter for the document’s name is 24.
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
4-77
7
4
Press the File Type drop-down list ➞ select the file format of
the document you want to forward.
System Manager Settings
If an I-fax is selected as a forwarding destination, this step is not necessary.
File Types:
• TIFF: Forwards images in the TIFF format.
• PDF: Inserts multiple images into a single PDF file. Received images can be
forwarded in the PDF format.
NOTE
• To view a TIFF file, a software application that supports the TIFF file format (such
as Imaging for Windows) is required.
• To view a PDF file, Adobe Acrobat Reader is required.
4-78
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
Select whether to divide images and place them on separate
pages.
If you want to separate multiple images and place them on separate pages, and
forward them as separate files, set Divide into Pages to ‘On’.
If you want to forward multiple images as a single file without dividing them, set
Divide into Pages to ‘Off’.
9
Press the Store/Print Received Doc. drop-down list ➞ select
[On] or [Off].
If [On] is selected, the received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox or
printed.
If [Off] is selected, the received document is not stored in the Memory RX Inbox
or printed.
NOTE
If Store/Print Received Doc. is set to ‘On’ and Memory Lock is set to ‘On’, the
received document is saved in the Memory RX Inbox. If Store/Print Received Doc.
is set to ‘On’ and Memory Lock is set to ‘Off’, the received document is printed.
(See “Storing Received I-Fax Documents in Memory,” on p. 4-40, and Chapter 2,
“Receiving a Document,” in the Sending Guide.)
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
4-79
4
System Manager Settings
8
10 Press [Forwarding Done Notice].
4
11 Select the destination where the forwarding done notice is to
System Manager Settings
be sent ➞ press [OK].
If a Confidential Fax Inbox is selected as a forwarding destination, this step is not
necessary.
If Access Number Management for an Address Book is set to ‘On’, press
[Access Number] ➞ enter the access number 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ specify
the destination ➞ press [OK]. If you do not want to specify an access number,
press [No Access Number]. (See Chapter 4, “Registering/Editing Address Book
Settings,” in the Sending Guide.)
Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries.
If the desired destination is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired destination.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books
(subaddress books 1 to 10 or One-touch Buttons). Subaddress books categorize
the addresses stored in the Address Book.
You cannot select multiple destinations.
4-80
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
NOTE
• To cancel the specified destination, select the destination again.
• To view more detailed information on an address, press [Details].
• To be able to select a destination for the forwarding done notice, it is necessary to
register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See Chapter 4,
“Registering/Editing Address Book Settings,” in the Sending Guide.)
12 Select whether to check [Notice Only for Errors].
System Manager Settings
4
If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent only when an error occurs,
press [Notice Only for Errors].
If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent every time a received
document is forwarded, do not press [Notice Only for Errors].
13 Press [OK].
The selected mode is set.
14 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
4-81
Checking/Changing Forwarding Setting Details
You can check/change the details of forwarding settings.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Forwarding Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
4
System Manager Settings
2
Select the desired forwarding setting whose details you want
to check ➞ press [Edit].
If the desired forwarding setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired forwarding setting.
4-82
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
4
Check or change the forwarding settings ➞ press [OK].
You can check the currently set forwarding conditions by pressing [▼] or [▲].
4
NOTE
For details on how to change forwarding settings, see “Storing Forwarding
Settings,” on p. 4-58.
System Manager Settings
3
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Forwarding Received Documents
You can set whether to forward received documents.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Forwarding Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
4-83
2
4
Select the desired forwarding setting ➞ press [Validate/
Invalidate] to turn the settings ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
System Manager Settings
If the desired forwarding setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired forwarding setting.
On: Forwards a document to specified destinations if they match the forwarding
conditions.
Off: Does not forward a document to specified destinations even if they match
the forwarding conditions.
To cancel forwarding, press [Validate/Invalidate] again.
The selected forwarding setting is enabled.
3
4-84
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
Deleting a Forwarding Setting
You can delete stored forwarding settings.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Forwarding Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
Select the forwarding setting to be erased ➞ press [Erase].
If the desired forwarding setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired forwarding setting.
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
4-85
System Manager Settings
2
4
3
Press [Yes].
If you do not want to erase the forwarding setting, press [No].
4
System Manager Settings
The selected forwarding setting is erased.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Printing a Forwarding Settings List
You can check and print a list of forwarding settings.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Forwarding Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
4-86
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
Press [Print List].
NOTE
If plain or recycled paper (11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR) is loaded in a paper
drawer that has been set to ‘On’ when you press [Other] to select a paper source in
Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS (from the Additional Functions screen), you can
print a list. (See “Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer
Switching,” on p. 3-14.)
3
Press [Yes].
If you do not want to print the list, press [No].
The forwarding conditions list is printed.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting Forwarding Conditions (Forwarding Settings)
4-87
4
System Manager Settings
2
Erasing a Message Board (Clear Message Board)
A Message Board is a feature used by the System Manager to display messages
for users of this machine on the touch panel display. Message board settings are
done from the Remote UI, however, erasing a message board can be done from the
main unit as well.
NOTE
For instructions on how to create a message board, see Chapter 2, “Remote UI
Functions,” in the Remote UI Guide.
4
System Manager Settings
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Clear
Message Board].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
4-88
Erasing a Message Board (Clear Message Board)
2
Press [Yes].
If you do not want to erase the message board, press [No].
4
3
System Manager Settings
The contents of the Message Board are cleared.
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Erasing a Message Board (Clear Message Board)
4-89
Auto Online/Offline (Auto Online/Offline)
It is necessary to connect this machine to a network to use the remote scanning
functions. This section explains how to switch between online and offline.
NOTE
[Auto Online/Offline] is only displayed if the Network Scan function is enabled.
Setting Auto Online (Auto Online)
If Auto Online is set to ‘On’, you can set this machine to automatically connect to a
network simply by pressing [Scan] on the Basic Features screen.
System Manager Settings
4
NOTE
The default setting is ‘Off’.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
2
Press [Auto Online/Offline] ➞ [Auto Online].
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
4-90
Auto Online/Offline (Auto Online/Offline)
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
The selected mode is set.
4
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting Auto Offline (Auto Offline)
Scanning is not possible with the Copy or Mail Box functions when the machine is
connected to a network (online). When Auto Offline is set to ‘On’, the machine
automatically goes offline when the Auto Clear function activates.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
2
Press [Auto Online/Offline] ➞ [Auto Offline].
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
Auto Online/Offline (Auto Online/Offline)
4-91
System Manager Settings
3
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
4
The selected mode is set.
System Manager Settings
3
NOTE
If Auto Offline is set to ‘On’, the machine automatically goes offline at the specified
Auto Clear Time. If the Auto Clear Time is set to ‘Off’ (0), the machine automatically
goes offline after approximately two minutes. (See “Setting the Time for the Display
to Return to the Basic Features Screen after Finishing Operations,” on p. 3-54.)
4
4-92
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Auto Online/Offline (Auto Online/Offline)
Setting MEAP Settings (MEAP Settings)
You can specify the settings if the HTTP is required for MEAP functions and MEAP
applications. You can also print the information of the MEAP applications.
Setting Use HTTP Server (Use HTTP)
Set the Use HTTP to ‘On’ to access this machine from a Web browser and use
MEAP applications.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [MEAP Settings] appears ➞ press
[MEAP Settings].
Setting MEAP Settings (MEAP Settings)
4-93
4
System Manager Settings
NOTE
• The default setting is ‘On’.
• Set the Use HTTP to ‘On’ if the HTTP is required for MEAP functions and MEAP
applications. To use HTTP for other than MEAP functions (e.g., Remote UI), set the Use
HTTP in Network Settings to ‘On’. (See Chapter 3, “Using a TCP/IP Network,” in the
Network Guide.)
• If you set the Use HTTP in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to
‘On’, the port number for the MEAP functions and MEAP applications is automatically set
to ‘8000’.
System Manager Settings
4
3
Press [Use HTTP].
4
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
If you do not want to use HTTP, press [Off].
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
Turn the main power OFF after this setting is made. This setting is only enabled
after the main power of the machine is turned back ON.
5
4-94
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting MEAP Settings (MEAP Settings)
Printing Installed Applications’ Information (Print System
Information)
You can print the information of the MEAP applications and certain system
applications.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
2
3
Press [▼] or [▲] until [MEAP Settings] appears ➞ press
[MEAP Settings].
Press [Print System Information].
Setting MEAP Settings (MEAP Settings)
4-95
4
System Manager Settings
NOTE
• This mode can be used only if the optional Network Multi-PDL Printer Kit is installed.
• The information is printed as a print job of the printer driver. You can check the details of
the job by pressing [System Monitor]. (See “Checking Job Details,” on p. 2-8.)
• The following attributes are set to the jobs when printing.
- Job Name: “MEAP SYSTEM INFORMATION” is always set.
- Job Client: The login name of the user who operates Additional Functions is set.
However, this is activated only if you enter from MEAP authentication.
- Client Job ID: ‘0’ is always set to the field of the application ID.
- Document Format: [Supported Document Format] is obtained using CPCA. If PCL
exists in the Supported Document Format, PCL is set. If PCL does not exist, ESC/P is
set.
4
Press [Yes].
To cancel printing, press [No].
4
System Manager Settings
The information of the installed applications is printed.
Items printed for each application are as follows:
• Application Name: Prints the name of the application.
• Application ID/System Application Name: Prints the file name for a system
application. Prints the application ID for a common application.
• Application Version: Prints the version name of an application.
• Status: Prints the status of the application.
- Installed: The application has been installed.
- Active: The application is running.
- Stopped: The application is in a non-operative state.
• Installed on: Prints the date and time the application is installed.
• Vender: Prints the name of the application vendor.
• License Status: Prints the license status.
- None: License is not necessary.
- Not Installed: License is necessary but has been disabled.
- Installed: An effective license has been installed.
- Invalid: License is invalid.
- Overlimit: Installed license has exceeded its limit.
• License Expires After: Prints the expiration date of the application. If License
Status is ‘None’, it is not printed.
• License Upper Limit: Prints upper limit for each counter. If License Status is
‘None’, it is not printed.
• Counter Value: Prints the current value for each counter. If License Status is
‘None’, it is not printed.
• Maximum Memory Usage: Prints the maximum memory usage of the
applications. The unit of the printed number is KByte.
• Registered Service: Prints the service registered on MEAP framework from the
application. Registered Service is printed only if there is data to correspond.
5
4-96
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting MEAP Settings (MEAP Settings)
LDAP Server Settings
If the information for an LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server is
registered in the machine, you can search for e-mail addresses through the LDAP
server. E-mail addresses obtained through the server can be specified as
destinations or stored in the Address Book.
NOTE
• The following types of LDAP servers can be used with this machine:
- Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory
- Novell NetWare 5.1 (NDS) or later
- Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later
For more information, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
• You can register up to five LDAP servers.
Registering an LDAP Server
You have to specify the relevant information for the LDAP server, such as the server
name and address.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Store LDAP Server] appears ➞ press
[Store LDAP Server].
LDAP Server Settings
4-97
System Manager Settings
4
Press [Store].
4
Press [Server Name].
5
Enter the server name ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
4
3
You can enter up to 24 characters for the server name.
4-98
LDAP Server Settings
You can also use
your entries.
0
-
9
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
C
(Clear) to clear
NOTE
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see “Entering Characters from the
Touch Panel Display,” on p. 1-43.
• The maximum number of characters you can enter for the server name is 24.
6
Press [Server Address].
7
System Manager Settings
4
Enter the server’s address ➞ press [OK].
You can also use
your entries.
0
-
9
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
C
(Clear) to clear
LDAP Server Settings
4-99
IMPORTANT
If <Login Information> is set to ‘Use (security auth.)’ for the LDAP server and
Reverse DNS Lookup (a function that looks up the host name from the IP address)
is not supported, enter a host name and not an IP address.
NOTE
You can enter up to 48 characters for the server’s address.
8
Press [Location to Start Search].
System Manager Settings
4
If the server’s LDAP version is 3, then you do not have to specify [Location to
Start Search]. (If the LDAP version is 3, the machine can automatically retrieve
settings from the server, and sets the location to start searching.) If the server’s
LDAP version is 2, you have to specify [Location to Start Search].
9
4-100
Enter the location to start searching ➞ press [OK].
LDAP Server Settings
Enter the location to start searching according to the type of LDAP server you are
using, or as described below.
• If you are using Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory:
You can also use
your entries.
0
-
9
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
C
(Clear) to clear
NOTE
You can enter up to 128 characters for the location to start searching.
10 Select [On] or [Off] for Use SSL (Secure Socket Layer).
[On]: SSL is used. Since using SSL enables the user to encode the content of the
communication, communication can be performed with greater security.
[Off]: SSL is not used.
LDAP Server Settings
4-101
4
System Manager Settings
Add “DC=” to each dot-separated series of characters in the Active Directory
domain name, and separate each series of characters by a comma.
Example: If <team1.salesdept.canon.co.jp> is the domain name in Active
Directory:
DC=team1, DC=salesdept, DC=canon, DC=co, DC=jp
• If you are using Novell NetWare 5.1 (NDS) or later:
Add the corresponding object class “o=”, “ou=”, or “c=” to each dot-separated
series of characters that configure the distinguished name, and separate each
series of characters by a comma.
Example: If <TEAM1.SALESDEPT.CANON> is the distinguished name in NDS:
ou=team1, ou=salesdept, o=canon
• If you are using Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later:
Enter the dn (Distinguished Name) of the node on the directory tree, such as
“ou=team1”, “ou=salesdept”, “o=canon”, or “c=jp”.
11 Press [Port Number] ➞ enter the port number using
0
-
9
(numeric keys).
4
System Manager Settings
You can enter any port number from 1 to 65,535.
If you make a mistake when entering the port number, press
the correct number.
C
(Clear) ➞ enter
12 Press [Max. No. of Addresses to Search] ➞ enter the
maximum number of addresses to search using
(numeric keys).
0
-
9
You can enter any number from 1 to 1,000.
If you make a mistake when entering the number, press
correct number.
4-102
LDAP Server Settings
C
(Clear) ➞ enter the
13 Press [Search Timeout] ➞ enter the timeout time, in seconds,
0
-
9
(numeric keys) ➞ press [Next].
4
Addresses are searched for a specified period of time.
You can enter any timeout time from 30 to 300 seconds, in one second
increments.
If you make a mistake when entering the timeout time, press
the correct time.
C
(Clear) ➞ enter
14 Select [Do not use], [Use], or [Use (security auth.)].
IMPORTANT
• [Use (security auth.)] next to <Login Information> can be selected only if the LDAP
server is running on Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory.
• If you entered an IP address in step 7, and Reverse DNS Lookup (a function that
looks up the host name from the IP address) is not supported, select either [Do not
use] or [Use].
• If <Login Information> is set to ‘Use (security auth.)’, the machine may not be able
to connect to the LDAP server if Date & Time Settings in Timer Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is different from the time settings on the LDAP server.
LDAP Server Settings
4-103
System Manager Settings
using
● If [Do not use] is selected:
❑ Select the Server LDAP version and character code ➞ press [OK].
4
System Manager Settings
UTF-8: Unicode
SJIS: Shift Japan Industrial Standard
EUC: Extended Unix Code
JIS:
Japan Industrial Standard
ISO:
International Organization for Standardization
Select the LDAP version and character code according to the LDAP server’s
environment.
● If [Use] is selected:
❑ Press [User].
4-104
LDAP Server Settings
❑ Enter the user name ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
You can enter up to 128 characters for the user name.
❑ Press [Password].
LDAP Server Settings
4-105
4
System Manager Settings
Enter the user name according to the type of LDAP server you are using.
- If you are using Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory:
Press [User] ➞ enter <Windows domain name/Windows user name>.
Example: If <team1> is the Windows domain name, and <user1> is the
Windows user name:
team1/user1
- If you are using Novell NetWare 5.1 (NDS) or later:
Press [User] ➞ add the corresponding object class “o=”, “ou=”, or “c=” to
each dot-separated series of characters that configure the distinguished
name, and separate each series of characters by a comma.
Example: If <user1.TEAM1.SALESDEPT.CANON> is the distinguished name
in NDS:
cn=user1, ou=team1, ou=salesdept, o=canon
- If you are using Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later:
Press [User] ➞ enter the dn (Distinguished Name) of the user, such as
“cn=admin”, “ou=team1”, or “o=salesdept”.
❑ Enter the password ➞ press [OK].
After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks
(*****).
4
System Manager Settings
NOTE
You can enter up to 24 characters for the password.
❑ Select [On] or [Off] for <Display authentication dialog when searching>.
[On]: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog
box is displayed even if a password is not required.
[Off]: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog
box is not displayed when a password is not required.
4-106
LDAP Server Settings
❑ Select the Server LDAP version and character code ➞ press [OK].
Select the LDAP version and character code according to the LDAP server’s
environment.
4
System Manager Settings
● If [Use (security auth.)] is selected:
❑ Press [User].
LDAP Server Settings
4-107
❑ Enter the user name ➞ press [OK].
Example: If <user1> is the Windows user name:
user1
4
System Manager Settings
NOTE
You can enter up to 128 characters for the user name.
❑ Press [Password].
4-108
LDAP Server Settings
❑ Enter the password ➞ press [OK].
After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks
(*****).
4
System Manager Settings
NOTE
You can enter up to 24 characters for the password.
❑ Press [Domain Name].
LDAP Server Settings
4-109
❑ Enter the domain name ➞ press [OK].
Enter the directory tree name of the Active Directory, such as
<team1.salesdept.canon.co.jp>.
4
System Manager Settings
NOTE
You can enter up to 128 characters for the domain name.
❑ Select [On] or [Off] for <Display authentication dialog when searching> ➞
press [OK].
[On]: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog
box is displayed even if a password is not required.
[Off]: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog
box is not displayed when a password is not required.
The display returns to the Store LDAP Server screen.
15 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
4-110
LDAP Server Settings
Changing an LDAP Server Setting
You can change the settings for a stored LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol) server.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Store LDAP Server] appears ➞ press
[Store LDAP Server].
3
Select the LDAP server whose settings you want to change ➞
press [Edit].
The settings for the selected LDAP server are displayed.
LDAP Server Settings
4-111
System Manager Settings
4
4
4
Change the necessary settings ➞ press [Next].
System Manager Settings
NOTE
For instructions on how to change the LDAP server settings, see “Registering an
LDAP Server,” on p. 4-97.
5
Select [Do not use], [Use], or [Use (security auth.)] ➞ change
the settings for the selected mode ➞ press [OK].
The display returns to the Store LDAP Server screen.
6
4-112
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
LDAP Server Settings
Deleting an LDAP Server
You can delete a stored LDAP server.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Store LDAP Server] appears ➞ press
[Store LDAP Server].
3
Select the LDAP server that you want to erase ➞ press
[Erase].
LDAP Server Settings
System Manager Settings
4
4-113
4
Press [Yes].
The selected LDAP server is erased.
4
System Manager Settings
To cancel erasing the LDAP server, press [No].
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Printing LDAP Server Settings
You can print out the LDAP server settings.
NOTE
For more information on the Registered LDAP Server List, see “Registered LDAP Server
List,” on p. 8-10.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
If the System Manager ID and Password have already been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using 0 - 9 (numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
2
4-114
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Store LDAP Server] appears ➞ press
[Store LDAP Server].
LDAP Server Settings
Press [Print List].
NOTE
If plain or recycled paper (11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR) is loaded in a paper
drawer that has been set to ‘On’ when you press [Other] to select a paper source in
Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS (from the Additional Functions screen), you can
print a list. (See “Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer
Switching,” on p. 3-14.)
4
Press [Yes].
To cancel printing, press [No].
The LDAP Server List is printed.
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
LDAP Server Settings
4-115
4
System Manager Settings
3
System Manager Settings
4
4-116
LDAP Server Settings
Routine Maintenance
5
CHAPTER
This chapter describes how to load paper, add toner, and perform routine cleaning.
Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Adding Toner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Routine Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Cleaning the Platen Glass/Rear Side of the Platen Glass Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Cleaning the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Cleaning the Feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
When an Original or Print Becomes Dirty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
While Using the Feeder (Feeder Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Output Sheets Are Dirty (Wire Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Consumables and Optional Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Optional Equipment for the Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
5-1
Loading Paper
This section describes how to load paper into the paper drawers.
IMPORTANT
When setting STMT-size paper, place it horizontally (STMTR).
NOTE
• The following paper sizes can be loaded into the paper drawers:
- Paper Drawers 1, 2: LTR
- Paper Drawers 3, 4: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, and STMTR
• For details on available paper stock that can be loaded into the paper drawers, see
“Available Paper Stock,” on p. 1-75.
Routine Maintenance
5
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawers
When the selected paper has run out, or the selected paper drawer runs out of
paper during printing, a screen prompting you to load paper appears on the touch
panel display.
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
IMPORTANT
A message also appears if the selected paper drawer is not fully inserted into the
machine. Properly insert the paper drawer.
5-2
Loading Paper
NOTE
• If the <Load paper.> message appears during printing, the remaining prints are
automatically made after you load the paper. When you select another paper drawer, the
remaining prints are made after you press [OK].
• To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
• If you press [Another Function], you can select and use the functions not being operated.
1
Routine Maintenance
5
Press and release the open button on the paper drawer in
which you want to load paper.
Loading Paper
5-3
2
Grip the handle, and pull out the paper drawer until it stops.
Routine Maintenance
5
If the drawer is stuck, and does not pull all the way out, do not pull it out by force.
Push it back into the machine, and try pressing the release button, and pulling it
out again.
3
Open a package of paper, and remove the paper stack.
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the
paper.
5-4
Loading Paper
IMPORTANT
• Rewrap any remaining paper in its original package, and store it in a dry place
away from direct sunlight.
• Do not load the following types of paper stock. Doing so may cause a paper jam.
- Severely curled or wrinkled paper
- Transparencies
- Paper on which color images have been copied.
- Paper which has been copied on using a digital full color copier (do not copy on
the reverse side of this paper).
- Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (do not copy on
the reverse side of this paper).
NOTE
• For high-quality prints, we recommend using Canon paper.
• Immediately, before loading the paper, fan the pages several times, and align the
edges to facilitate feeding. Also, you should fan the paper when you remove it from
a newly opened package.
Routine Maintenance
5
Loading Paper
5-5
4
Load the paper.
Even out the edges of the paper stack. Load the paper stack against the right
wall of the paper drawer.
When loading paper in paper drawers 3 or 4 for the first time, make sure to label
the size plate to match the paper size loaded in the paper drawer.
Routine Maintenance
5
IMPORTANT
• If the paper is curled, curl it down before placing it in the paper drawer.
• Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the limit mark at the
back of the paper drawer.
• Make sure that the paper size setting on the paper drawer matches the size of the
paper that is loaded.
NOTE
• Paper drawers 1 and 2 hold about 1,500 sheets of paper each (20 lb bond (80
g/m2)).
• Paper drawers 3 and 4 hold about 550 sheets of paper each (20 lb bond (80 g/m2)).
• For details about the print direction of paper already printed with logos or patterns,
see “Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output
Chart,” on p. 8-19.
5-6
Loading Paper
Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it
clicks.
5
CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to
get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
IMPORTANT
Never place paper or any other items in the open part of the paper drawer next to
the paper stack. Doing so may cause a paper jam.
NOTE
If paper runs out during printing, load the paper, and follow the instructions on the
touch panel display. The machine automatically restarts and produces the
remaining prints.
Loading Paper
5-7
Routine Maintenance
5
Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size
If you want to load a new paper size in a paper drawer, follow the procedure
described below to adjust the paper drawer guides.
IMPORTANT
• A different size of paper can be loaded in paper drawer 3 only.
• The paper size loaded in paper drawer 4 can only be changed by your service
representative. For more details, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
• When setting STMT-size paper, place it horizontally (STMTR).
NOTE
You can adjust the paper drawers to hold the following standard paper sizes: 11" x 17",
LGL, LTR, LTRR, and STMTR.
1
Press and release the open button on the paper drawer that
you want to adjust.
Routine Maintenance
5
2
5-8
Pull out the paper drawer, and remove all of the loaded paper.
Loading Paper
Squeeze the lever on the left guide, as shown in the
illustration. Without releasing the lever, slide the left guide to
align it with the mark for the desired paper size.
Left guide
When loading 11" x 17"-size paper, slide the left guide all the way to the left, and
push it down.
5
Routine Maintenance
3
Loading Paper
5-9
4
Squeeze the lever on the front guide, as shown in the
illustration. Without releasing the lever, slide the front guide to
align it with the mark for the desired paper size.
Front guide
IMPORTANT
If the left and front guides are not adjusted properly for the paper size loaded in the
paper drawer, the correct paper size may not appear on the touch panel display.
Improperly adjusting the guides may also cause paper jams, dirty prints, or make
the inside of the machine dirty. To prevent these problems, check that the guides
are adjusted correctly for the loaded paper size.
Routine Maintenance
5
5
Load the appropriate paper size into the drawer.
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the
paper.
5-10
Loading Paper
7
Change the paper drawer’s size plate to match the new paper
size that you loaded.
Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it
clicks.
5
Routine Maintenance
6
CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to
get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Loading Paper
5-11
Adding Toner
When there is only a small amount of toner remaining, the message below appears
on the touch panel display. Prints can still be made, but at this time, you should
purchase new toner so that you have it on hand when it is needed.
Routine Maintenance
5
When the toner has run out and prints can no longer be made, a message
describing how to add toner appears on the touch panel display. Add toner by
following the described procedure.
CAUTION
Never dispose of the finished toner in a fire or incinerator. This may result in an
explosion.
5-12
Adding Toner
IMPORTANT
• The screen prompting you to add toner is displayed until you press [Recover Later/Done].
• Use only the toner bottle recommended for use with this machine.
• Never add more than one bottle of toner.
• Add toner after the <Add toner.> message is displayed.
NOTE
• When the <Add toner.> message appears, approximately 300 prints can still be made
(LTR-size Canon Standard Chart). However, since this number may vary depending
upon the original being copied, it is recommended that the toner be added as soon as
possible.
• You can check how to add toner by pressing [Previous] or [Next] on the screen.
• If the toner runs out during a print job, the remaining prints are made after you add toner.
1
Open the toner supply cover.
Routine Maintenance
5
2
Hold the toner bottle with both hands, as shown in the
illustration, and turn it up and down a few times, to evenly
distribute the toner inside the bottle.
Adding Toner
5-13
3
Align the protrusions of the toner bottle with the slots on the
toner supply port. Gently press the toner bottle down into the
toner supply port until you hear a click.
The toner bottle is now locked into the toner supply port.
4
Routine Maintenance
5
5
5-14
Press down lightly on the toner bottle with one hand, and pull
out the black shutter of the toner supply port with your other
hand as far as it will go.
Grip the shutter of the toner bottle, and pull it out slowly until
it stops.
Adding Toner
6
7
Lightly tap the top of the toner bottle to make sure that all of
the toner empties into the toner box.
Push back the shutter of the toner bottle, and the toner supply
port.
Routine Maintenance
5
8
Make sure you hear a click when the black shutter of the toner
supply port has been pushed back in as far as the position.
When the toner bottle starts to come loose from the toner supply port, lightly hold
it so that it does not fall over.
Adding Toner
5-15
CAUTION
Never try to remove the toner bottle before you hear the shutter clicking
into the toner supply port. This can damage the toner supply port.
9
Remove the empty toner bottle from the toner supply port.
WARNING
5
Routine Maintenance
Do not throw used toner bottles into open flames. This may ignite the toner
remaining inside the bottle, and result in burns or a fire.
CAUTION
When removing used toner bottles from the toner supply port, remove the
bottles carefully to prevent the toner from scattering and entering your
eyes or mouth. If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately
with cold water and consult a physician.
10 Close the toner supply cover.
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
11 Press [Recover Later/Done] on the touch panel display to
close the screen prompting you to add toner.
5-16
Adding Toner
Routine Cleaning
If the original is not scanned cleanly, clean the following parts of the machine. For
high-quality prints, we recommend cleaning these parts once or twice a month.
• Platen
glass
side of the platen glass cover
• Feeder scanning area
• White plate, Roller
• Rear
WARNING
• When cleaning the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch, then
CAUTION
Do not dampen any cloth you use to clean with too much, as this may damage
the original or break the machine.
Cleaning the Platen Glass/Rear Side of the Platen Glass
Cover
Clean the platen glass or the rear side of platen glass cover by following the
procedure below.
IMPORTANT
If the platen glass or the rear side of the platen glass cover is dirty, the original may not
be scanned cleanly, or the size of the original may be detected incorrectly.
Routine Cleaning
5-17
5
Routine Maintenance
disconnect the power cord. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other solvents for cleaning. This
might deform or cause damage to the plastic parts in this machine.
• Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly, and clean the area
around the base of the power plug’s metal pins and the power outlet with a dry
cloth to ensure that all dust and grime is removed. If the power cord is
connected for a long period of time in a damp, dusty, or smoky location, dust
can build up around the power plug and become damp. This may cause a short
circuit and result in a fire.
1
2
Wipe the platen glass with a cloth dampened with water or a
mild cleaning agent. Then, wipe the area with a dry cloth.
Routine Maintenance
5
Open the feeder.
3
5-18
Wipe the rear side of platen glass cover with a cloth
dampened with water or a mild cleaning agent. Then, wipe the
area with a dry cloth.
Routine Cleaning
4
Close the feeder.
CAUTION
Close the feeder gently to avoid catching your hand, as this may result in
personal injury.
Follow the procedure below to clean the touch panel display.
1
Wipe the touch panel display with a cloth dampened with
water or a mild cleaning agent. Then, wipe the area with a dry
cloth.
NOTE
Since the touch panel display becomes dirty with normal use, we recommend that
you clean it once a week or every 10 days.
Routine Cleaning
5-19
Routine Maintenance
5
Cleaning the Touch Panel Display
Cleaning the Feeder
Follow the procedure below to clean the feeder scanning area, white plate and
roller.
IMPORTANT
• If the feeder scanning area is dirty, it may result in problems in reading originals or a dirty
print out.
• Spin the roller while cleaning it.
1
Open the feeder cover, by pulling up the lever on the top of the
feeder.
Routine Maintenance
5
2
5-20
Clean the roller (a total of 8 places) on the rear side of the
feeder cover with a dampened cloth. Then, wipe the area with
a dry cloth.
Routine Cleaning
3
4
Clean the roller (a total of 3 places) as shown in the
illustration, with a dampened cloth. Then, wipe the area with a
dry cloth.
Open the middle cover by holding the knob in the back.
Routine Maintenance
5
5
Clean the roller (a total of 5 places) with a dampened cloth.
Then, wipe the area with a dry cloth.
Routine Cleaning
5-21
6
7
Clean the roller underneath (a total of 4 places) with a
dampened cloth. Then, wipe the area with a dry cloth.
Close the middle cover.
Routine Maintenance
5
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
5-22
Routine Cleaning
8
Close the feeder cover.
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
5
Open the feeder.
Routine Maintenance
9
10 Clean the feeder scanning area with a dampened cloth. Then,
wipe the area with a dry cloth.
Routine Cleaning
5-23
11 Clean the white plate underneath the feeder with a dampened
cloth. Then, wipe the area with a dry cloth.
IMPORTANT
Do not push on the white plate hard. The white plate is a soft, delicate area.
5
Routine Maintenance
12 Close the feeder.
CAUTION
Close the feeder gently to avoid catching your hand, as this may result in
personal injury.
5-24
Routine Cleaning
When an Original or Print Becomes Dirty
While Using the Feeder (Feeder Cleaning)
If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after feeding them through the
feeder caused by powder from a pencil rubbing off onto the roller, or the roller
becomes dirty, perform a feeder cleaning.
Cleaning is done by repeatedly feeding blank paper though the feeder.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning].
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Feeder Cleaning] appears ➞ press
[Feeder Cleaning].
3
Place 10 blank LTR-size sheets of paper in the feeder ➞ press
[Start].
If you do not want to clean the Feeder, press [Cancel].
When an Original or Print Becomes Dirty
5
Routine Maintenance
NOTE
• The Adjustment/Cleaning screen is made up of several screens. Press [▼] or [▲] to scroll
to the desired screen and make the required settings.
• It takes about 10 seconds to clean the feeder.
5-25
While the feeder is being cleaned, the screen below appears.
NOTE
To cancel the Feeder Cleaning, press [Cancel].
4
Routine Maintenance
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Output Sheets Are Dirty (Wire Cleaning)
If dirt appears on the printed paper, clean the wire of the corona assembly in the
main unit as the need arises.
NOTE
• It takes about 30 seconds to clean the wire.
• Wire cleaning cannot be performed while printing.
1
2
5-26
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning].
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Wire Cleaning] appears ➞ press [Wire
Cleaning].
When an Original or Print Becomes Dirty
3
Press [Start].
If you do not want to clean the wire, press [Cancel].
While wire cleaning is being performed, the screen below appears.
Routine Maintenance
5
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
When an Original or Print Becomes Dirty
5-27
Consumables and Optional Equipment
The following consumables and accessories are available from Canon. For more
details, consult your local authorized Canon dealer.
We recommend that you order paper stock and toner from your local authorized
Canon dealer before your stock runs out.
Consumables
■ Paper Stock
In addition to plain paper (11" x 17", LGL, LTR, and STMT), transparencies, labels, and
other types of paper stock are available. For details, consult your local authorized Canon
dealer.
Routine Maintenance
5
CAUTION
Do not store paper in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the
paper to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
IMPORTANT
• For high-quality print output, we recommend using Canon paper.
• To prevent moisture build-up, store any remaining paper tightly wrapped in its original
package.
5-28
Consumables and Optional Equipment
■ Black Toner
If the <Add toner.> message appears on the touch panel display, add toner which has
been approved for use with this machine. Only black toner can be used with this machine.
WARNING
Never dispose of waste toner in a fire or incinerator. Doing so, may result in an
explosion.
Do not store toner bottles in places exposed to open flames. This may cause the
toner to ignite and result in a burn or a fire.
IMPORTANT
Store toner bottles in a cool location, away from direct sunlight. (The recommended
storage conditions are: temperatures below 86°F, and humidity below 80%.)
■ Genuine Supplies
Canon has developed and manufactured parts, supplies, and GPR-4 Toner specifically for
use in this machine. For superior print quality, we recommend that you use CanonGENUINE brand parts, supplies, and GPR-4 Toner in this machine. Ask your local
authorized Canon dealer for Canon-Genuine brand parts, supplies, and GPR-4 Toner.
Consumables and Optional Equipment
5-29
Routine Maintenance
5
CAUTION
Optional Equipment for the Main Unit
■ Cassette-P3
You can adjust this cassette to suit the paper size you want to load. (See “Adjusting a
Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size,” on p. 5-8.)
• Available paper sizes: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, and STMTR
Routine Maintenance
5
5-30
Consumables and Optional Equipment
Troubleshooting
6
CHAPTER
This chapter describes what to do in response to a paper jam in the main unit or an error
message on the touch panel display.
Clearing Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Screen Shown When There Is a Paper Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Clearing Paper Jams in the Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Clearing Paper Jams Inside the Right Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Clearing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17
Clearing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-20
Clearing Paper Jams in the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24
Clearing Paper Jams in Paper Drawers 3 or 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-27
Clearing Paper Jams in the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
List of Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34
Self-Diagnostic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34
List of Error Codes without Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-47
Service Call Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-49
When Calling Your Local Authorized Canon Dealer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-50
When the Power Does Not Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52
6-1
Clearing Paper Jams
If a paper jam occurs, the following screen appears on the touch panel display.
Screen Shown When There Is a Paper Jam
The display indicating the location of the paper jam appears on the touch panel
display, followed by instructions on how to clear the paper jam. This display will
repeatedly appear on the touch panel display, until the paper jam is entirely cleared.
■ Example of the display indicating the location of the paper jam:
You can confirm the location of the paper jam.
Troubleshooting
6
IMPORTANT
• When a paper jam occurs in the feeder, you cannot continue to operate the machine.
Follow the directions on the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. (See
“Clearing Paper Jams in the Feeder,” on p. 6-29.)
• If the MEAP screen is displayed, a message appears in the Job/Print monitor area. Press
[System Monitor] ➞ follow the procedures that appear on the touch panel display to help
you remove the jammed paper.
NOTE
When you press [Recover Later], you can continue operations such as mode settings or
scanning, even if the jammed paper is not removed immediately.
6-2
Clearing Paper Jams
■ Example of the display indicating how to clear the paper jam.
CAUTION
• When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on
the edges of the originals or paper.
• When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do
Clearing Paper Jams
6-3
6
Troubleshooting
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to allow the toner to come into
contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If
they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with
warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting your eyes or mouth. If toner gets your eyes or mouth, wash them
immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
1
Inspect all areas which appear as red circles on the touch
panel display, and remove any jammed paper. See the
appropriate pages for instructions on how to find and remove
jammed paper.
● The following display indicates the possible locations where a paper
jam may occur, and the page numbers describing how to remove the
jammed paper.
Exit slot
Feeder
Remove the protruding
paper.
(See “Clearing Paper Jams in the Feeder,” on p. 6-29.)
Main Unit
(See “Clearing Paper Jams in
the Main Unit,” on p. 6-7.)
Stack Bypass
(See “Clearing Paper Jams in
the Stack Bypass,” on p. 6-24.)
6
Troubleshooting
Paper Drawer 1
(See “Clearing Paper Jams in
Paper Drawer 1,” on p. 6-17.)
Right Cover
(See “Clearing Paper Jams Inside
the Right Cover,” on p. 6-14.)
Paper Drawer 2
Paper Drawer 3 or 4
(See “Clearing Paper Jams in
Paper Drawer 2,” on p. 6-20.)
(See “Clearing Paper Jams in
Paper Drawers 3 or 4,” on p. 6-27.)
IMPORTANT
If a jammed paper tears while being removed, be sure to remove any remaining
pieces from inside the machine.
6-4
Clearing Paper Jams
If a paper jam occurs within an optional unit, see the
directions on how to clear a paper jam on the following pages
for each option.
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
See “Clearing Paper Jams in the Finisher,” on p. 7-15.
Paper Deck-G1
See “Clearing Paper Jams in the Paper Deck,” on p. 7-4.
6
Troubleshooting
2
Clearing Paper Jams
6-5
Copy Tray-C3
See “Clearing Paper Jams in the Copy Tray,” on p. 7-44.
3
6
Troubleshooting
4
After you have cleared all paper jams at the locations
indicated on the touch panel display, restore all levers and
covers to their original positions.
Continue operations, following the instructions displayed on
the touch panel display.
If there is remaining paper to be removed, a screen indicating how to clear the
paper jam appears on the touch panel display. Repeat the procedure from
step 1.
Printing resumes after all indicated paper jams are cleared, unless there is still a
paper jam in the feeder.
6-6
Clearing Paper Jams
Clearing Paper Jams in the Main Unit
If a paper jam occurs inside the main unit, a screen similar to the one shown below
appears on the touch panel display. Check where the jam has occurred, and follow
the procedure described below and the procedure that appears on the touch panel
display to help you remove the jammed paper.
1
Troubleshooting
6
Open the front cover of the main unit.
Clearing Paper Jams
6-7
2
Move the green lever in the direction of the arrow.
3
Grip the lever, and pull out Unit 1.
Unit 1
Troubleshooting
6
Unit 2
NOTE
Unit 1 and Unit 2 are pulled out together.
4
6-8
Remove any remaining jammed paper from Unit 1.
Clearing Paper Jams
5
6
Open the left cover of Unit 1.
Turn the green knob in the direction of the arrow, and remove
any jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
6
CAUTION
The parts located around the cover are subject to high temperatures. When
removing jammed paper, take care not to touch anything in this area
except the left cover and the green knob.
7
Turn the knob on Unit 2 in the direction of the arrow displayed
below, and remove any jammed paper.
Clearing Paper Jams
6-9
8
Close the left cover of Unit 1.
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
9
Gently push Unit 1 back into its original position.
Troubleshooting
6
CAUTION
When returning Unit 1 to its original position, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
6-10
Clearing Paper Jams
10 Return the green lever to its original position.
11 Remove any remaining jammed paper from Unit 2.
12 Open the left cover on Unit 2, and remove any jammed paper
as shown in the illustration.
Clearing Paper Jams
6-11
Troubleshooting
6
13 Open the right cover on Unit 2, and remove any jammed paper
as shown in the illustration.
14 Lift up the top portion of Unit 2, and remove any jammed
paper. Then, close it.
Troubleshooting
6
15 Gently push Unit 2 back to its original position.
CAUTION
When returning Unit 2 to its original position, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
6-12
Clearing Paper Jams
16 Clear all jammed papers, and close the front cover.
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
17 Continue to follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
Clearing Paper Jams
6-13
6
Troubleshooting
NOTE
The screen indicating how to remove the paper jam will remain displayed, until the
paper jam has been cleared. (See “Screen Shown When There Is a Paper Jam,” on
p. 6-2.)
Clearing Paper Jams Inside the Right Cover
If a paper jam occurs inside the right cover, a screen similar to the one shown
below appears on the touch panel display. Check where the jam has occurred, and
follow the procedure described below and the procedure that appears on the touch
panel display to help you remove the jammed paper.
6
Troubleshooting
NOTE
If the Paper Deck-G1 (optional) is attached, move the paper deck away from the main
unit. (See “Paper Deck-G1,” on p. 7-3.)
1
6-14
Open the upper right cover of the main unit.
Clearing Paper Jams
2
Remove any jammed paper.
3
Close the upper right cover.
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
4
Open the lower right cover of the main unit.
Clearing Paper Jams
6-15
Troubleshooting
6
5
Remove any jammed paper.
6
Close the lower right cover.
If the Paper Deck-G1 (Optional) has been moved, reattach the paper deck to the
main unit. (See “Paper Deck-G1,” on p. 7-3.)
Troubleshooting
6
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
7
Continue to follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating how to remove the paper jam will remain displayed, until the
paper jam has been cleared. (See “Screen Shown When There Is a Paper Jam,” on
p. 6-2.)
6-16
Clearing Paper Jams
Clearing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 1
If a paper jam occurs in Paper Drawer 1, a screen similar to the one shown below
appears on the touch panel display. Check where the jam has occurred, and follow
the procedure described below and the procedure that appears on the touch panel
display to help you remove the jammed paper.
1
Open the upper right cover of the main unit.
Clearing Paper Jams
6-17
6
Troubleshooting
NOTE
If the Paper Deck-G1 (optional) is attached, move the paper deck away from the main
unit. (See “Paper Deck-G1,” on p. 7-3.)
2
Remove any jammed paper.
3
Close the upper right cover of the main unit.
Troubleshooting
6
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
4
6-18
Press and release the paper drawer release button of the
paper drawer indicated on the touch panel display, until the
paper drawer comes out.
Clearing Paper Jams
5
Pull out Paper Drawer 1.
If the drawer seems to be stuck, do not pull it out by force. Push it back into the
machine, and try pressing the release button and pull it out again.
6
Remove any jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
6
7
Return the paper drawer to its original position.
If the Paper Deck-G1 (optional) has been moved, reattach the paper deck to the
main unit. (See “Paper Deck-G1,” on p. 7-3.)
CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to
catch your fingers between the edge of the paper drawer and the main unit.
Clearing Paper Jams
6-19
8
Continue to follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating how to remove the paper jam will remain displayed, until the
paper jam has been cleared. (See “Screen Shown When There Is a Paper Jam,” on
p. 6-2.)
Clearing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 2
If a paper jam occurs in Paper Drawer 2, a screen similar to the one shown below
appears on the touch panel display. Check where the jam has occurred, and follow
the procedure described below and the procedure that appears on the touch panel
display to help you remove the jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
6
1
6-20
Open the front cover of the main unit.
Clearing Paper Jams
2
3
Turn the green knob in the direction of the arrow, to feed the
jammed paper to Unit 2.
Gently pull out Unit 2.
Troubleshooting
6
4
Open the top cover of Unit 2, and remove any jammed paper.
Then, close it.
Clearing Paper Jams
6-21
5
Gently push Unit 2 back into its original position.
CAUTION
When returning Unit 2 to its original position, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
6
Close the front cover.
Troubleshooting
6
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
6-22
Clearing Paper Jams
7
8
Press and release the paper drawer release button of the
paper drawer indicated on the touch panel display, until the
paper drawer comes out.
Pull out Paper Drawer 2.
Troubleshooting
6
If the drawer seems to be stuck, do not pull it out by force. Push it back into the
machine, and try pressing the release button and pull it out again.
9
Remove any jammed paper.
Clearing Paper Jams
6-23
10 Return the paper drawer to its original position.
CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to
catch your fingers between the edge of the paper drawer and the main unit.
11 Continue to follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating how to remove the paper jam will remain displayed, until the
paper jam has been cleared. (See “Screen Shown When There Is a Paper Jam,” on
p. 6-2.)
Troubleshooting
6
Clearing Paper Jams in the Stack Bypass
If a paper jam occurs in the stack bypass, a screen similar to the one shown below
appears on the touch panel display. Check where the jam has occurred, and follow
the procedure described below and the procedure that appears on the touch panel
display to help you remove the jammed paper.
6-24
Clearing Paper Jams
NOTE
If the Paper Deck-G1 (optional) is attached, move the paper deck away from the main
unit. (See “Paper Deck-G1,” on p. 7-3.)
1
Open the upper right cover of the main unit.
2
Remove all loaded paper from the stack bypass.
Troubleshooting
6
3
Remove any jammed paper inside on the right cover.
Clearing Paper Jams
6-25
4
Close the upper right cover.
If the Paper Deck-G1 (optional) has been moved, reattach the paper deck to the
main unit. (See “Paper Deck-G1,” on p. 7-3.)
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
5
6
Continue to follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
Troubleshooting
NOTE
The screen indicating how to remove the paper jam will remain displayed, until the
paper jam has been cleared. (See “Screen Shown When There Is a Paper Jam,” on
p. 6-2.)
6-26
Clearing Paper Jams
Clearing Paper Jams in Paper Drawers 3 or 4
If a paper jam occurs in paper drawers 3 or 4, a screen similar to the one shown
below appears on the touch panel display. Check where the jam has occurred, and
follow the procedure described below and the procedure that appears on the touch
panel display to help you remove the jammed paper.
1
Press and release the paper drawer release button of the
paper drawer indicated on the touch panel display, until the
paper drawer comes out.
Clearing Paper Jams
6-27
Troubleshooting
6
2
Pull out the paper drawer.
If the drawer seems to be stuck, do not pull it out by force. Push it back into the
machine, and try pressing the release button and pull it out again.
3
Remove any jammed paper.
4
Return the paper drawer to its original position.
Troubleshooting
6
CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to
catch your fingers between the top of the paper drawer and the main unit.
6-28
Clearing Paper Jams
5
Continue to follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating how to remove the paper jam will remain displayed, until the
paper jam has been cleared. (See “Screen Shown When There Is a Paper Jam,” on
p. 6-2.)
Clearing Paper Jams in the Feeder
If a paper jam occurs in the Feeder, a screen similar to the one shown below
appears on the touch panel display. Check where the jam has occurred, and follow
the procedure described below and the procedure that appears on the touch panel
display to help you remove the jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
6
1
Open the Feeder Cover.
Clearing Paper Jams
6-29
2
Remove any jammed originals.
3
Open the middle cover by holding the knob in the back.
4
Remove any jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
6
6-30
Clearing Paper Jams
5
Close the middle cover.
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
Turn the roller knob on the back edge of the feeder in the
direction of the arrow. Remove any jammed paper.
6
Troubleshooting
6
Clearing Paper Jams
6-31
7
Once you have removed the jammed paper, close the Feeder
Cover.
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
8
Open the Feeder, and remove any jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
6
6-32
Clearing Paper Jams
9
Close the Feeder.
CAUTION
Close the feeder gently to avoid catching your hand, as this may result in
personal injury.
10 Continue to follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
Clearing Paper Jams
6-33
6
Troubleshooting
NOTE
The screen indicating how to remove the paper jam will remain displayed until the
paper jam has been cleared. (See “Screen Shown When There Is a Paper Jam,” on
p. 6-2.)
List of Error Messages
Self-Diagnostic Display
If a self-diagnostic message appears, follow the instructions on the touch panel
display.
Self-diagnostic (error) messages appear on the touch panel display at the following
times:
• When
printing cannot be performed because of an operational error.
• When you need to make a decision or take some action during scanning or
printing.
• When you need to make a decision or take some action during browsing the
network.
The following is a list of self-diagnostic messages, along with possible causes and
remedies.
Troubleshooting
6
Load paper.
Cause
: The machine has run out of paper. No more prints can be made.
The paper drawer is not correctly inserted.
Remedy
: Load paper. (See “Loading Paper in the Paper Drawers,” on p. 5-2.)
Insert the paper drawer as far as it will go. (See “Loading Paper in the Paper
Drawers,” on p. 5-2.)
Load LTR size paper.
Cause
: The paper drawer loaded with the best paper size, selected by the Automatic
Paper Selection mode is not inserted into the machine.
Remedy1 : Load the indicated paper size in a paper drawer.
Remedy2 : If you press
(Start) while this message is displayed, the print is made with the
currently selected paper size.
Remedy3 : If the message remains, even when the indicated paper is loaded, set the
Drawer Eligibility of that paper drawer to ‘On’. (See “Setting a Paper Drawer for
Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching,” on p. 3-14.)
6-34
List of Error Messages
Return page 1 to the top, and then press the Start key.
Cause
: Scanning was stopped due to a problem with the Feeder.
Remedy
: Arrange the originals in page order with the first page on top. Place the originals
back in the Feeder’s original supply tray ➞ press
(Start).
Remove the paper from the output tray.
Cause
: Prints from the previous job remain in the output tray.
Remedy
: Remove the prints from the output tray. Printing resumes. If printing does not
resume, press
(Start).
Attach the Finisher to the main unit.
: The Finisher is not properly connected to the main unit.
Remedy
: Connect the Finisher to the main unit properly. (See “Finisher-F1/Saddle
Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1,” on p. 7-10.)
6
Paper is jammed in the indicated location. Remove the jammed paper.
Cause
: An original jam or paper jam has occurred, preventing you from making prints.
Remedy
: Remove paper from the machine following the guidance messages on the touch
panel display. (See “Clearing Paper Jams,” on p. 6-2.)
No toner.
Cause
: There is not enough toner to print.
Remedy
: Add toner using the toner bottle recommended for use with this machine.
(See “Adding Toner,” on p. 5-12.)
Place the original on the platen glass.
Cause
: There is no original on the platen glass.
The programmed function (mode) requires the original to be placed on the
platen glass.
Remedy
: Place the original on the platen glass.
List of Error Messages
6-35
Troubleshooting
Cause
Remove the original from the platen glass.
Cause
: The original remains on the platen glass.
Remedy
: Remove the original from the platen glass, and place the next document for
copying.
Remove the original from the feeder.
Cause
: The original is placed both in the feeder and on the platen glass. The specified
mode, which is programmed, requires the original placed on the platen glass
only.
Remedy
: Remove the original from the feeder.
Out of resources. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again.
6
Cause
: You cannot browse the network, because the network is congested as a result
of continuous sending or heavy use of FTP or Windows (SMB).
Remedy
: Wait a moment, and browse again.
Troubleshooting
Set the IP Address.
Cause
: The IP address of the main machine has not been set.
Remedy
: Set the IP address in Additional Functions and turn the main power back ON.
No response from the server. Check the settings.
Cause
: The setting of the specified server is not correct or the server’s power has not
been turned on.
Otherwise, resources may be insufficient.
Remedy
: Wait for a while and try connecting again. If you cannot connect, select another
server.
NetWare is in use. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again.
6-36
Cause
: You cannot browse the network, as NetWare printing uses PServer or NDS
PServer.
Remedy
: Browse again after NetWare printing is complete.
List of Error Messages
There are too many sub-directories.
Cause
: You have exceeded the number of characters you can enter.
Remedy
: You cannot specify the path. Specify a shorter path.
No response.
Cause
: An unspecified error occurred.
Remedy
: Contact your system manager.
List of Error Codes without Messages
If the job or operation does not complete correctly, check the End Code, and
perform the necessary operations according to the End Code displayed. You can
check the End Code in the Details screen under Log in the System Monitor screen.
(See “Checking Job Details,” on p. 2-8.)
Take the necessary procedures depending on the error code.
NOTE
If a send job is canceled, <STOP> appears in the Results column.
#022
Cause
: Forwarding cannot be performed because the contents of the Group Address
specified as forwarding destinations have been deleted or are only User
Inboxes.
Transmission cannot be performed because, when you send documents to
destinations registered in an Address Book, the destinations are deleted from
the Address Book while awaiting transmission.
Remedy
: Set the forwarding destinations/addresses in the Address Book correctly.
#037
Cause
: You could not receive documents because there was no memory available.
Remedy
: Erase error documents or unwanted documents in order to make memory
available. (See Chapter 4, “Using/Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox,” in
the Mail Box Guide.)
List of Error Messages
6-37
6
Troubleshooting
If a Send job or Receive job does not end normally, the error code is printed in the
Results column on the Activity Report and Send Result Report. (See “Specifying
Report Settings,” on p. 3-68.)
#099
Cause
: Copy/print is interrupted.
Remedy
: Try to copy/print again.
#701
Cause
: No Department ID was set when the job was entered, or the password has
changed.
Remedy
: Enter the correct Department ID or password.
#702
Cause
: You cannot send documents because of insufficient memory.
Remedy
: Please wait a few moments.
Try again, after other Send jobs are complete.
Do not send a document to multiple recipients at the same time.
Send the document in smaller partitions and/or to a smaller number of
recipients.
Troubleshooting
6
#703
Cause
: You cannot write because of insufficient memory for image data.
Remedy
: Please wait a few moments.
Try again after other Send jobs complete.
Erase documents stored in an inbox.
If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, then
turn it back ON.
#704
6-38
Cause
: An error occurred when receiving address information from an Address Book.
Remedy
: Check the address settings.
If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, then
turn it back ON.
List of Error Messages
#705
Cause
: The Send operation was interrupted because the size of the image data is larger
than the Maximum Data Size for Sending set from the Additional Functions
screen.
Remedy
: Change the setting for the Maximum Data Size for Sending from the Additional
Functions screen.
Select a lower resolution mode or, if you are using I-Fax, decrease the number
of pages containing images that you are sending each time, so that you do not
exceed the Maximum Data Size for Sending.
#706
Cause
: The Address Book is being imported or exported from the Remote UI, or it is
being used by another sending component.
Remedy
: Try sending again.
#711
: There was insufficient memory in the inbox.
Remedy
: Delete the documents stored in the inbox.
6
Troubleshooting
Cause
#712
Cause
: The maximum number of documents is stored in an inbox.
Remedy
: Delete the documents stored in the inbox.
#749
Cause
: Because the service call message is being displayed, you cannot perform jobs.
Cause
: Turn the main power OFF, wait for 10 seconds, and turn the main power back
ON. If the machine still does not work, turn the main power OFF, unplug the
machine, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
After the service call message disappears, send the job again.
#751
Cause
: The server is not functioning. The Network is down (unable to connect to the
network or was cut off during connection).
Remedy
: Check the recipients address.
Check that the network is connected.
List of Error Messages
6-39
#752
Cause
: The SMTP server name is not correct, or the server is not functioning. The
domain name or e-mail address may not be set.
The Network is down.
Remedy
: Check the SMTP server name, domain name, and e-mail address set in the
Additional Functions screen.
Check that the SMTP server is operating properly.
Check the network status.
#753
Cause
: An error occurred in TCP/IP while sending an e-mail. (Socket, Select error, etc.)
Remedy
: Check the network cables and connectors.
If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, then
turn it back ON.
#754
Troubleshooting
6
Cause
: The Server is not functioning when sending data or the network is down.
The destination setting is not correct.
Remedy
: Check the server and network.
Check the destination settings.
#755
Cause
: You cannot send jobs because TCP/IP is not functioning correctly.
IP address is not set.
When configuring the machine, the IP address is not correctly registered for
either DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP.
Remedy
: Check the TCP/IP setting on the Additional Functions screen.
#756
6-40
Cause
: The NetWare setting from the Additional Functions screen is set to ‘Off’.
Remedy
: Set the NetWare setting to ‘On’.
List of Error Messages
#801
Cause
: A Timeout Error occurred on the server side during communication with a mail
server, while sending e-mail or sending/receiving an
I-Fax.
The SMTP server returned an error while trying to connect.
The destination is not correct.
An error occurred on the server side during transmission to a file server.
You are sending to a NetWare destination which you have no permission to
overwrite.
Remedy
: Check that the SMTP server is operating correctly.
Check the network status.
Check the destination setting.
Check the status and setting of the file server.
Cause
: The e-mail/I-Fax SMTP server setting in Additional Functions is not correct.
The DNS server name setting is not correct.
Connection to the DNS server failed.
Remedy
: Check the names of the SMTP server and DNS server in Additional Functions.
Check that the DNS server is operating correctly.
6
Cause
: Before sending all pages, the network connection was cut by the recipient.
Remedy
: Send the documents again.
Troubleshooting
#802
#803
#804
Cause
: Unable to match a specified directory name when sending data to a file server.
You have no permission to access the folder.
Remedy
: Check the destination.
Change the setting to enable access to the folder from the server side.
#805
Cause
: Insufficient hard disk space on the server.
Remedy
: Delete documents stored on the server.
List of Error Messages
6-41
#806
Cause
: Incorrect user name or password was specified when sending to the file server.
An incorrect destination was specified when sending e-mail/I-Fax.
Remedy
: Change the user name or password of the destination.
Check the destination of the e-mail/I-Fax.
#807
Cause
: You do not have the permission to access the specified directory.
Remedy
: Set the authority required to access the server’s directory, then send again to
the accessible server.
#808
Cause
: An error occurred on the server while sending data to a file server.
Remedy
: Reboot the server or perform other maintenance techniques as necessary.
#809
Troubleshooting
6
Cause
: A same file name exists on the server and cannot be overwritten.
Remedy
: Change the settings on the file server to enable overwriting.
#810
Cause
: A POP server connection error occurred when receiving an I-Fax. The POP
server returned an error during connection. A timeout error occurred on the
server side during connection to the POP server.
Remedy
: Check the POP server name setting in Additional Functions. Confirm that the
POP server is operating correctly. Check the network status.
#815
Cause
: Attempted to log on to a file server that has already been logged on by you. You
cannot log on to the same device with the same user name.
Remedy
: Wait a few moments to send the data again; change the NetWare server to
send, or stop the PServer.
#816
6-42
Cause
: Unavailable to print because the quantity exceeded the limit set in Department
ID Management.
Remedy
: Contact your system manager.
List of Error Messages
#817
Cause
: A communication error occurred with the remote copy printers.
Remedy
: Check the network, and try again. If the machine still does not operate correctly,
contact your system manager.
#818
Cause
: Received data is not in a printable file format.
Remedy
: Ask the sender to change the file format and resend.
#819
Cause
: You have received data that cannot be processed. (MIME information is
incorrect.)
Remedy
: Check the settings and ask the sender to resend.
#820
: You have received data that cannot be processed. (BASE 64 or uuencode is
incorrect.)
Remedy
: Check the settings and ask the sender to resend.
#821
Cause
: You have received data that cannot be processed. (TIFF analysis error occurs.)
Remedy
: Check the settings and ask the sender to resend.
#822
Cause
: You have received data that cannot be processed. (Image cannot be decoded.)
Remedy
: Check the settings and ask the sender to resend.
#823
Cause
: Unable to connect with the remote copy printers.
Remedy
: Check the network, and try again. If the machine still does not operate correctly,
contact your system manager.
List of Error Messages
6-43
Troubleshooting
6
Cause
#824
Cause
: A communication error occurred with the remote copy printers.
Remedy
: Check the network, and try again. If the machine still does not operate correctly,
contact your system manager.
#825
Cause
: The Department ID and password of the copy job are not registered in the
remote copy printers. Printing cannot be performed because the ID and
password of the reserved or current print jobs have been deleted or the
password has been changed.
Remedy
: Register the Department ID and password of the copy job in the remote copy
printers. Use the remote copy printer in which the Department ID and password
of the copy job are registered. Try again with a different Department ID and
password. If you do not know the password, contact your system manager.
#827
Troubleshooting
6
Cause
: You have received data that cannot be processed. (Contains MIME information
that is not supported.)
Remedy
: Check the settings and ask the sender to resend.
#828
Cause
: You have received HTML data.
Remedy
: Ask the sender to use a file format other than HTML and resend.
#829
Cause
: Data that contains more than 1,000 pages is received.
Remedy
: This machine can print or store up to 999 pages of data in memory, but will
delete any data over that amount. Ask the sender to resend the remainder.
#830
6-44
Cause
: DSN error notification is received because of incorrect I-Fax address and
destination condition settings, or the data size of the sent documents exceed the
mail server capacity.
Remedy
: Check the I-Fax address and destination condition settings.
Set the maximum data size for sending so that it is less than the mail server
capacity.
Check the status of the mail server, DNS server, and network.
List of Error Messages
#831
Cause
: I-Fax document is not received using SMTP because of the RX/Print Range
setting in the IP Address Range Settings in Additional Functions.
Remedy
: Reset the RX/Print Range setting in the IP Address Range Settings in Additional
Functions.
#832
Cause
: The DSN mail was not sent because the e-mail settings and network settings in
Additional Functions have not been set or trouble has occurred at the mail
server end.
Remedy
: Check the DNS Server Settings in the Network Settings, and the E-mail/I-Fax,
and IP address settings in Additional Functions.
Check the status of the mail server and DNS server.
#833
Remedy
: The MDN mail has not been sent because the Network Settings in Additional
Functions have not been set or trouble has occurred at the mail server end.
: Check the DNS Server Settings in the Network Settings, and the E-mail/I-Fax,
and IP address settings in Additional Functions.
Check the status of the mail server and DNS server.
#834
Cause
: An MDN error notification is received because I-Fax address or destination
condition settings are incorrect, trouble has occurred in the network or mail
server, or the memory of the machine at the recipient’s end is full.
Remedy
: Check the I-Fax address and destination condition settings.
#835
Cause
: The maximum number of text lines for receiving an I-Fax have been exceeded.
Remedy
: Ask the sender to reduce the amount of text data in the body of the document
and resend.
#838
Cause
: The MEAP application license has expired.
Remedy
: Purchase a MEAP application license.
List of Error Messages
6-45
6
Troubleshooting
Cause
#851
Cause
: Not enough memory in the main unit, or the scanned document cannot be
stored because there are more than 100 documents in the specified inbox.
Remedy
: Check the available memory of the main unit, and delete unwanted documents
in the inboxes. If there are a large number of documents, delete them from the
specified inbox.
#852
Cause
: An error occurred because the main power switch was turned OFF while a job
was being processed.
Remedy
: Check to see if the main power switch is ON. Try processing the job again if
necessary.
#853
Troubleshooting
6
Cause
: When trying to print a large number of pages, the job is not performed due to
insufficient memory resources.
Remedy
: Reduce the number of pages to print or perform the print job again when other
jobs are not reserved.
#899
Cause
: The e-mail or I-Fax has been successfully sent, but reception may be
incomplete because transmission was relayed via multiple servers.
Remedy
: Confirm whether reception was complete.
Check if you receive an error mail.
#995
6-46
Cause
: Reserved jobs were cleared.
Remedy
: Repeat the procedure as necessary.
List of Error Messages
If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning
If memory becomes full during the scanning of originals, the following messages
could appear on the touch panel display.
1
Operate the machine according to the message, and follow
the appropriate procedure.
● If the message asking whether to print the original pages scanned
into memory appears:
❑ Select [Yes], [No], or [Another Function].
If you press [Yes]: Pages scanned into memory are printed. When printing is
complete, scan the remaining originals.
If you press [No]: Pages scanned into memory are not printed.
If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning
6-47
6
Troubleshooting
NOTE
The machine’s memory can store about 4,000 pages of images (LTR-size Canon
Standard Chart, standard setting). Within the memory, a 3,600 page image region is
shared by all functions, including the Copy, Printer, and Mail Box functions. In addition to
this, each function is guaranteed to hold the following number of pages:
Copy:
100 pages
Printer: 100 pages
Mail Box: 100 pages
Others: 100 pages
For example, the Copy function can hold up to 3,700 pages of images.
100 + 3,600 = 3,700 pages
However, the number of pages that the machine’s memory can hold may differ depending
on the amount of memory required for documents stored in inboxes and jobs on standby.
If you press [Another Function]: Select and use the other functions that are
not being used.
● If the screen below appears:
❑ Select [Cancel] or [Another Function].
Troubleshooting
6
[Cancel]: Returns to the Basic Features screen. Try printing when the current
job is complete.
If you press [Another Function]: Select and use the other functions that are
not being used.
6-48
If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning
Service Call Messages
If a malfunction occurs and the machine does not operate normally, a screen
similar to the one shown below (the service call message) appears on the touch
panel display. If this message appears, follow the procedure described below.
WARNING
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may result
in electrical shock.
CAUTION
Always grasp the plug portion when disconnecting the power cord. Pulling on
the power cord may expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the
power cord. If the power cord is damaged, this could cause current to leak,
resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
IMPORTANT
If you turn the main power switch OFF when there is a reserved print job, that job is
erased.
Service Call Messages
6-49
Troubleshooting
6
When Calling Your Local Authorized Canon Dealer
1
2
Troubleshooting
6
Turn the main power switch OFF. Allow at least 10 seconds
before turning the main power switch back ON.
If the machine still does not operate normally, carry out the
following procedure, and contact your local authorized Canon
dealer.
Turn OFF the main power, and disconnect the power plug.
6-50
Service Call Messages
Contact your service representative.
Confirm the following information when contacting your local authorized Canon
dealer:
• Product name
• Type of problem and the status of the machine
• The error code appearing on the touch panel display
6
Troubleshooting
3
Service Call Messages
6-51
When the Power Does Not Turn ON
If the machine does not operate, even though the main power switch and the
control panel switch are both ON, check that the breaker is not OFF.
If the breaker is OFF, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. Do not switch the
breaker back ON.
(I side)
(
side)
Troubleshooting
6
WARNING
If the breaker is in the OFF position, do not switch the current leakage breaker
back ON. Doing so may lead to a fire, electrical shock, smoke, or the tripping of
other breakers in the facility.
6-52
When the Power Does Not Turn ON
Optional Equipment
7
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the use of optional equipment and what to do if there is a paper jam in
one of these optional unit.
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Paper Deck-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Clearing Paper Jams in the Paper Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Loading Paper in the Paper Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Finishing Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
Clearing Paper Jams in the Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Replacing the Staple Cartridge in the Stapler Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Removing Jammed Staples from the Stapler Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Clearing Paper Jams in the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25
Replacing the Saddle Stitcher Unit’s Staple Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29
Removing Jammed Staples from the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32
Clearing Paper Jams in the Puncher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37
Removing Punch Waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42
Copy Tray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43
Clearing Paper Jams in the Copy Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-44
Card Reader-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47
Operations before Using the Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Operations after Using the Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-49
Department ID Management When Using the Card Reader-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-50
Erasing Print Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-57
Setting to Accept Print Jobs with an Unknown ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60
7-1
System Configuration
The following optional equipment can be attached to the machine.
Saddle Finisher-F2
Card Reader-C1
Main Unit
Paper Deck-G1
7
Optional Equipment
Finisher-F1
Copy Tray-C3
NOTE
Peel the film off the touch panel display before using it.
7-2
System Configuration
Puncher Unit-B1
Paper Deck-G1
If you attach the Paper Deck-G1 to the machine, you have one additional source of
paper which can be used for printing jobs.
Up to 3,500 sheets (20 lb bond (80 g/m2)) of paper can be loaded in the paper deck.
IMPORTANT
When the machine is in the Low-Power Mode (the touch panel is not displayed, and only
(Energy Saver) and the Main Power indicators are lit), you may not be able to open
the paper deck. In this case, press
(Energy Saver) beforehand to reactivate the
machine, and press the open button on the paper deck.
NOTE
The paper size of the paper deck is fixed to LTR.
Parts and Their Functions
2
Optional Equipment
7
1
3
4
a Release Lever
Press to remove the paper deck from the Main
Unit.
b Open Button
Press to load paper or to check for a paper jam.
c Paper Deck
Max. 3,500 sheets (20 lb bond (80 g/m2)) can be
stacked.
d Paper Supply Indicator
Enables you to check the amount of paper
remaining in the paper deck.
Paper Deck-G1
7-3
Clearing Paper Jams in the Paper Deck
If a paper jam occurs inside the Paper Deck-G1, a screen similar to the one shown
below appears on the touch panel display. Check where the jam has occurred, and
follow the procedure described below and the procedure that appears on the touch
panel display to help you remove the jammed paper.
CAUTION
• When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on
the edges of the originals or paper.
• When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to allow the toner to come into
contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If
they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with
warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting your eyes or mouth. If toner gets your eyes or mouth, wash them
immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
Optional Equipment
7
7-4
Paper Deck-G1
1
2
Press the release lever to remove the paper deck from the
main unit.
Remove any jammed paper.
3
Optional Equipment
7
Press the open button to open the paper deck.
IMPORTANT
When the machine is in the Low-Power Mode (the touch panel is not displayed, and
only
(Energy Saver) and the Main Power indicators are lit), you may not be able
to open the paper deck. In this case, press
(Energy Saver) beforehand to
reactivate the machine, and press the open button on the paper deck.
Paper Deck-G1
7-5
4
Remove any jammed paper.
5
Close the paper deck, and reconnect it to the main unit.
Optional Equipment
7
CAUTION
When reconnecting the paper deck to the main unit, be careful not to get
your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
6
Continue to follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating how to remove the paper jam will remain displayed, until the
paper jam has been cleared. (See “Screen Shown When There Is a Paper Jam,” on
p. 6-2.)
7-6
Paper Deck-G1
Loading Paper in the Paper Deck
1
Press the open button to open the paper deck.
IMPORTANT
When the machine is in the Low-Power Mode (the touch panel is not displayed, and
only
(Energy Saver) and the Main Power indicators are lit), you may not be able
to open the paper deck. In this case, press
(Energy Saver) beforehand to
reactivate the machine, and press the open button on the paper deck.
Open a package of paper, and remove the paper stack. Make
sure that the seam on the center of the package is face up.
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the
paper.
Paper Deck-G1
7-7
7
Optional Equipment
2
IMPORTANT
• Rewrap any remaining paper in its original package, and store it in a dry place
away from direct sunlight.
• Do not load the following types of paper stock into the paper deck. Doing so may
cause a paper jam.
- Severely curled or wrinkled paper
- Transparencies
- Paper on which color images have been copied.
- Paper which has been copied on using a digital, full-color copier (do not copy on
the reverse side of the printed paper).
- Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (do not copy on
the reverse side of this paper).
NOTE
• For high-quality prints, we recommend using Canon paper.
• Immediately before loading paper, fan the pages several times, and align the edges
to facilitate feeding. Also, fan the paper when you remove it from a newly opened
package.
Optional Equipment
7
7-8
Paper Deck-G1
3
Load the paper.
IMPORTANT
• If the paper is curled, curl it down before placing it in the paper deck.
• Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the limit mark at the
back of the paper deck.
NOTE
The paper deck holds up to 3,500 sheets of paper (20 lb bond (80 g/m2)).
Close the paper deck.
7
Optional Equipment
4
CAUTION
When returning the paper deck to its original position, be careful not to get
your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
NOTE
For details on print direction of paper already printed with logos or patterns, see
“Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart,” on
p. 8-19.
Paper Deck-G1
7-9
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
Parts and Their Functions
1
2
3
8
7
Optional Equipment
7
4
5
6
* This illustration shows the Saddle Finisher-F2 with the Puncher Unit-B1 attached to it.
* In the description on the following pages, Finisher-F1 and Saddle Finisher-F2 are referred to
collectively as “Finisher” unless otherwise stated.
7-10
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
a Upper Cover
Open to remove jammed paper.
b Top Cover of the Puncher Unit
Open this cover when a paper jam occurs in the
puncher unit.
c Front Cover of the Puncher Unit
Open this cover when a paper jam occurs in the
puncher unit, or when removing punch waste.
d Upper Front Cover
Open this cover to replace the staple case in the
staple unit, or when a staple jam occurs.
e Lower Front Cover
Open this cover when a paper jam or staple jam
occurs in the saddle stitcher unit, or when
replacing the saddle stitcher unit’s staple
cartridge.
* Only available with the Saddle Finisher-F2.
f Booklet Tray
The paper that is folded and stapled at the center
to form a booklet is delivered to this tray.
* Only available with the Saddle Finisher-F2.
g Output Tray B
Papers are output to these trays. Assign
specified functions to output to a designated tray.
h Output Tray A
Finishing Functions
The Finisher is equipped with the following functions.
■ Collate Mode
This function automatically collates print sets into page order before they are delivered.
■ Group Mode
This function outputs all prints of the same page in one set and slightly shifts the output
position of the other print sets to make them easier to handle.
■ Offset Mode
This function outputs papers by shifting them to the front.
IMPORTANT
You cannot set the Offset mode when printing on STMTR-size paper.
NOTE
When the Collate or Group functions are set or prints are output from a computer, the
output papers are shifted about 1 1/4" (30 mm) before delivery.
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
7-11
7
Optional Equipment
NOTE
The tray moves down when each set of paper is delivered. When the delivered paper
reaches the stacking limit of the tray, the paper is automatically delivered to another
suitable tray. When the paper reaches the stacking limit of all of the suitable trays, printing
stops temporarily. After you remove the delivered paper from the tray, the tray moves up
the corresponding distance and printing of the remaining sets resumes.
■ Staple Mode
This function automatically collates print sets into page order, staples the sets, and
outputs them.
CAUTION
Do not put your hand in the tray’s stapling area when the machine is equipped
with the Finisher. This may result in injury.
IMPORTANT
• You cannot set the Staple mode when printing on transparencies, tracing paper, and
labels.
• You cannot corner staple STMTR-size paper.
• You cannot double staple LGL, LTRR, or STMTR-size paper.
NOTE
• If the number of sheets to staple in one set exceeds 30 (for 11" x 17", LGL, and LTRR
size) or 50 (for LTR size), stapling can not be performed. Only Collating is performed.
• If the machine stops while stapling, and a message <Load staples> appears, this means
that almost all of the staples have been used, and the staple case must be replaced. In
this case, replace the staple case. (See “Replacing the Staple Cartridge in the Stapler
Unit,” on p. 7-18.)
• Copies
are stapled in the following places.
When an original is placed on the platen glass:
7
Optional Equipment
Corner Staple Area
Double Staple Area
Upper Left
V
CBA
V
CBA
Upper Right
Left Side
Lower Right
Right Side
Lower Left
CBA
Upper Left
V
CBA
Upper Right
Lower Right
Lower Left
7-12
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
Left Side
Right Side
When originals are placed in the feeder:
Corner Staple Area
Double Staple Area
Upper Right
Upper Left
Lower Left
Lower Right
ABC
ABC
Right Side
Left Side
Upper Right
Upper Left
Lower Left
Lower Right
ABC
ABC
Right Side
Left Side
■ Saddle Stitching Mode
This function enables you to make booklets consisting of pages that are folded and
stapled in the center.
Optional Equipment
7
The pages are folded with
a roller to form a booklet.
7
2
8
1
1
8
5
4
6
3
6
3
IMPORTANT
• The maximum number of sheets that can be bound is 15.
• The paper sizes that can be saddle stitched are 11" x 17" and LTRR.
• This function is only available when the Saddle Finisher-F2 is attached.
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
7-13
■ Hole Punch Mode
This function punches holes (2 or 3 holes) in the printed sheets.
• The
hole punched area is as shown in the illustration.
Platen Glass
Feeder
V
CBA
Hole
Punched
Area
ABC
Hole
Punched
Area
V
CBA
Hole
Punched
Area
7
Optional Equipment
• The
ABC
Hole
Punched
Area
distance between the punched holes is as shown in the illustration.
4 1/4"
4 1/4"
(108 mm) (108 mm)
2 3/4"
(70 mm)
3 holes
2 holes
IMPORTANT
• The machine automatically selects the type of hole punch (2 or 3 holes) depending on
the selected paper size.
- 2 holes: LGL, LTRR
- 3 holes: 11" x 17", LTR
• You cannot punch holes in STMTR-size paper.
• Holes cannot be punched in transparencies, tracing paper, labels, and 3-hole punch
paper.
• This function is only available when the Finisher is equipped with the Puncher Unit-B1.
7-14
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
Clearing Paper Jams in the Finisher
If a paper jam occurs when using the Finisher, a screen similar to the one shown
below appears on the touch panel display. Check where the jam has occurred, and
follow the procedure described below and the procedure that appears on the touch
panel display to help you remove the jammed paper.
CAUTION
• When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
7-15
7
Optional Equipment
the edges of the originals or paper.
• When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to allow the toner to come into
contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If
they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with
warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting your eyes or mouth. If toner gets your eyes or mouth, wash them
immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
1
Carefully remove any paper protruding from the output tray.
IMPORTANT
If you use the staple mode while making prints, do not remove the output sheets
that are not yet stapled. (Stapling will continue after you remove the jammed
paper.)
2
Open the top cover, and check the inside of the finisher.
Optional Equipment
7
7-16
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
3
Lift up Cover 1, and remove any jammed paper. Then, return
Cover 1 to its original position.
Cover 1
Cover 2
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
Lift up Cover 2, and remove any jammed paper.
7
Optional Equipment
4
NOTE
When you lift up Cover 2, Cover 1 is also lifted.
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
7-17
5
Return Cover 2 to its original position, and close the top
cover.
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
6
NOTE
The screen indicating how to remove the paper jam will remain displayed until the
paper jam has been cleared. (See “Screen Shown When There Is a Paper Jam,” on
p. 6-2.)
7
Optional Equipment
Continue to follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
Replacing the Staple Cartridge in the Stapler Unit
When the Finisher runs out of staples, the staple cartridge must be replaced. A
display similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Follow
the procedure described below to replace the staple cartridge.
7-18
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
1
Open the upper front cover of the Finisher.
2
Push down the green lever.
The staple case will slightly slide out.
3
Pull out the protruding staple case by holding its left and right
sides.
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
7-19
Optional Equipment
7
4
Pull out the empty staple cartridge.
Place the staple case as shown in the illustration, and pull out the staple
cartridge.
5
Insert the new staple cartridge.
Optional Equipment
7
NOTE
• Only one staple cartridge can be inserted at a time.
• Use only the specifically recommended staple cartridge for use on this machine.
7-20
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
6
7
Remove the seal, fixing the staples, by pulling it straight out.
Gently push the staple case back into the Finisher until the
green lever returns to its original position.
8
Make sure that the staple case is firmly secured, and close the
upper front cover of the Finisher.
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
7-21
Optional Equipment
7
NOTE
When you close the cover, the staple unit automatically performs a <dry> stapling
operation several times to reposition the staples.
Removing Jammed Staples from the Stapler Unit
If a staple jam occurs, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the
touch panel display. Follow the procedure described below to remove any jammed
staples.
Optional Equipment
7
1
7-22
Open the upper front cover of the Finisher.
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
2
Push down the green lever.
The staple case will slightly slide out.
3
Pull out the protruding staple case by holding its left and right
sides.
4
Optional Equipment
7
Lower the bracket on the staple case.
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
7-23
5
6
Remove all of the jammed staples that slide from the staple
cartridge.
Return the bracket on the staple case to its original position.
Optional Equipment
7
7
7-24
Gently push the staple case back into the finisher until the
green lever returns to its original position.
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
8
Make sure that the staple case is firmly secured, and close the
upper front cover of the finisher.
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
NOTE
When you close the cover, the staple unit automatically performs a <dry> stapling
operation several times to reposition the staples.
If a paper jam occurs in the Saddle Finisher-F2 while using the Booklet Mode, a
screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check
where the jam has occurred, and follow the procedure described below and the
procedure that appears on the touch panel display to help you remove the jammed
paper.
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
7-25
Optional Equipment
7
Clearing Paper Jams in the Saddle Stitcher Unit
CAUTION
• When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on
the edges of the originals or paper.
• When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to allow the toner to come into
contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If
they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with
warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting your eyes or mouth. If toner gets your eyes or mouth, wash them
immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
NOTE
This procedure is only required when the Saddle Finisher-F2 is attached to the machine.
1
Move the Saddle Finisher-F2 away from the main unit. Hold
the section indicated in the figure.
Optional Equipment
7
2
7-26
Remove the jammed paper.
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
3
Connect the Saddle Finisher-F2 to the main unit.
CAUTION
When returning the Finisher to its original position, be careful not to catch
your fingers between the edge of the Finisher and the main unit.
4
Open the lower front cover of the finisher.
5
Optional Equipment
7
Turn the knob on the right counterclockwise.
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
7-27
6
Press in the knob on the left, and turn it clockwise.
7
Remove any jammed paper.
8
Close the lower front cover of the finisher.
Optional Equipment
7
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
7-28
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
9
Continue to follow the instructions on the touch panel
display.
NOTE
The screen indicating how to remove the paper jam will remain displayed until the
paper jam has been cleared. (See “Screen Shown When There Is a Paper Jam,” on
p. 6-2.)
Replacing the Saddle Stitcher Unit’s Staple Cartridge
When the finisher runs out of staples, the staple cartridge must be replaced. A
screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Follow
the procedure described below to replace the staple cartridge.
IMPORTANT
Before replacing the staple cartridge, remove all output sheets from the booklet tray.
NOTE
This procedure is only required when the Saddle Finisher-F2 is attached to the machine.
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
7-29
Optional Equipment
7
1
Open the lower front cover of the finisher.
2
Pull out the saddle stitcher unit.
Optional Equipment
7
3
7-30
Pull out the stapler unit on the saddle stitcher unit, and push it
up.
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
4
5
Pull out the empty staple cartridge by holding its left and right
sides.
Insert the new staple cartridge.
IMPORTANT
Replace both the inner and outer staple cartridges at the same time.
6
Push the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit back in and
down. Then, return it to its original position.
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
7-31
Optional Equipment
7
7
Push the entire saddle stitcher unit back into the finisher, and
close the lower front cover.
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
IMPORTANT
Once you have replaced the staple cartridge, be sure to reposition the staples in
the saddle stitcher unit. (See “Staple Repositioning for the Saddle Stitcher Unit,” on
p. 3-61.)
Optional Equipment
7
Removing Jammed Staples from the Saddle Stitcher Unit
If a staple jam occurs, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the
touch panel display. Follow the procedure described below to remove any jammed
staples.
IMPORTANT
Before removing any jammed staples, remove all output sheets from the booklet tray.
7-32
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
NOTE
• If a paper jam occurs at the same time as a staple jam, remove the jammed paper before
removing the jammed staples.
• This procedure is only required when the Saddle Finisher-F2 is attached to the machine.
1
Open the lower front cover of the finisher.
2
Pull out the saddle stitcher unit.
Optional Equipment
7
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
7-33
3
4
Pull out the stapler unit on the saddle stitcher unit, and push it
up.
Grasp the left and right sides of the staple cartridge, and
remove it.
Optional Equipment
7
5
On the stapler unit, push down Part A, and pull up Knob B.
B
A
7-34
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
6
7
Remove the jammed staples, and return Knob B to its original
position.
Return the staple cartridge to its original position.
8
Push the stapler unit on the saddle stitcher unit in and down
as shown, and return it to its original position.
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
7-35
Optional Equipment
7
9
Push the entire saddle stitcher unit back into the machine,
and close the lower front cover.
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in a personal injury.
IMPORTANT
Once you have removed the jammed staples, be sure to reposition the staples
inside the saddle stitcher unit. (See “Staple Repositioning for the Saddle Stitcher
Unit,” on p. 3-61.)
Optional Equipment
7
7-36
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
Clearing Paper Jams in the Puncher Unit
If a paper jam occurs in the puncher unit, a screen similar to the one shown below
appears on the touch panel display. Check where the jam has occurred, and follow
the procedure described below and the procedure that appears on the touch panel
display to help you remove the jammed paper.
CAUTION
• When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on
NOTE
This procedure is only required when the Puncher Unit-B1 is attached to the machine.
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
7-37
7
Optional Equipment
the edges of the originals or paper.
• When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to allow the toner to come into
contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If
they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with
warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting your eyes or mouth. If toner gets your eyes or mouth, wash them
immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
1
Open the front cover of the puncher unit.
2
Align the ▲ of the knob within the range of
3
Close the front cover of the puncher unit.
.
Optional Equipment
7
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
7-38
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
4
Open the top cover of the puncher unit.
5
Remove any jammed paper.
6
Optional Equipment
7
Close the top cover of the puncher unit.
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
7-39
7
Continue to follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating how to remove the paper jam will remain displayed until the
paper jam has been cleared. (See “Screen Shown When There Is a Paper Jam,” on
p. 6-2.)
Removing Punch Waste
When the punch waste tray becomes full, a screen similar to the one shown below
appears on the touch panel display. Follow the procedure described below to
remove the punch waste.
Optional Equipment
7
IMPORTANT
When the punch waste tray is full, you cannot make copies or prints using the Hole
Punch mode.
NOTE
This procedure is only required when the Puncher Unit-B1 is attached to the machine.
7-40
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
1
Open the front cover of the puncher unit.
2
Pull out the punch waste tray.
3
Optional Equipment
7
Discard the punch waste into a receptacle.
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
7-41
4
Return the punch waste tray to its original position.
NOTE
If the tray is not returned securely in place, you will be unable to make copies or
prints when the Punch Mode is selected.
5
Close the front cover of the puncher unit.
Optional Equipment
7
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
Consumables
Use only the staple cartridges recommended for use on this machine. There is a
space behind the upper front cover for storing staple cartridges (equivalent to the
space occupied by three staple cartridges).
NOTE
We recommend that you order staple cartridges from your local authorized Canon dealer
before they run out.
7-42
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2/Puncher Unit-B1
Copy Tray-C3
The Copy Tray-C3 is equipped with the following functions:
■ Collate Function
This function automatically collates papers into sets arranged in page order, and outputs
them.
■ Group Function
This function outputs all prints of the same page in one group.
■ Rotate Function
This function collates paper of the same size, and outputs the copy sets in alternating
directions.
IMPORTANT
The paper sizes that can be selected when you set the Rotate function are LTR and
LTRR.
7
Optional Equipment
Parts and Their Functions
1
a Copy tray
Paper is output here.
Copy Tray-C3
7-43
NOTE
Adjust the auxiliary tray according to the paper size.
Clearing Paper Jams in the Copy Tray
If a paper jam occurs in the Copy Tray-C3, a screen similar to the one shown below
appears on the touch panel display. Check where the jam has occurred, and follow
the procedure described below and the procedure that appears on the touch panel
display to help you remove the jammed paper.
Optional Equipment
7
7-44
Copy Tray-C3
CAUTION
• When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on
the edges of the originals or paper.
• When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to allow the toner to come into
contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If
they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with
warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting your eyes or mouth. If toner gets your eyes or mouth, wash them
immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
Remove any paper protruding from the output tray.
7
In the case of face up output, open the front cover, and remove any paper
protruding from the exit slot while turning the knob on the Unit 1. Then, close the
front cover.
Copy Tray-C3
7-45
Optional Equipment
1
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
2
Continue to follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating how to remove the paper jam will remain displayed until the
paper jam has been cleared. (See “Screen Shown When There Is a Paper Jam,” on
p. 6-2.)
Optional Equipment
7
7-46
Copy Tray-C3
Card Reader-C1
When the Card Reader-C1 (optional) is attached to the main unit, you must insert
the control card before operating this machine. The Card Reader-C1 controls
Department ID Management automatically.
IMPORTANT
• If you use a login service other than Default Authentication, Limit Functions setting is not
available.
• If SSO is set as a login service, you cannot use the Card Reader-C1 (optional).
• If SDL is set as a login service, enter your card number in the card ID field. See the
MEAP SMS Administrator Guide for details.
Magnetic Card
Optical Card
CONTROL CARD III
CONTROL CARD
123
123
001
Card Reader-C1
7-47
7
Optional Equipment
NOTE
• If the Basic Features screen does not appear on the touch panel display even when the
control card is inserted, make sure that:
- The control card is inserted in the correct direction.
- The control card is inserted as far as it can go.
- An unusable control card is not inserted.
• Insert the usable control card correctly.
• For instructions on how to turn the power ON, see “Main Power and Control Panel
Power,” on p. 1-32.
• When the Card Reader-C1 (optional) is attached, the following two types of cards can be
used:
- The optical card can manage up to 200 departments.
- The magnetic card can manage up to 3,000 departments.
• The maximum number of departments that can be managed, depends on the machine.
The imageRUNNER 6020i/5020i and imageRUNNER 6020/5020 can manage up to
1,000 departments.
Operations before Using the Main Unit
1
Insert the control card into the card slot. Make sure it faces in
the correct direction.
The Basic Features screen appears on the touch panel display.
Optional Equipment
7
7-48
Card Reader-C1
Operations after Using the Main Unit
After you finish using the machine, remove the control card.
The touch panel display returns to the screen prompting the user to insert a
control card.
7
Optional Equipment
1
If SDL is set as a login service, the following screen is displayed.
Card Reader-C1
7-49
Department ID Management When Using
the Card Reader-C1
This section explains how to use Department ID Management, and how to check
the print totals when the control card is being used.
NOTE
The maximum number of digits you can store for a password is seven. If you store them
with less than seven digits, the machine stores them as follows:
- Example: If <321> is entered ➞ <0000321> is stored
Changing the Password and Impression Limit
You can change the password and impression limit of the stored Department ID.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Dept.
ID Management].
If a System Manager ID/Password is set, press [System Settings] ➞ enter the
System Manager ID and System Password ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
Optional Equipment
7
2
7-50
Press [Store Dept. ID/Password].
Card Reader-C1
4
Display the Department to be changed by pressing [▼] or [▲]
➞ press [Edit].
Use 0 - 9 (numeric keys) to enter the password and
impression limit.
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter the password.
❑ Press [Impression Limit] ➞ enter the impression limit ➞ press [OK].
7
Optional Equipment
3
You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number <0>, such as
<0000000>.
The Impression Limit Range is from 0 to 999999. You cannot print more than the
set limit number of impressions.
To delete the number you entered, press
C
(Clear).
Card Reader-C1
7-51
5
6
Press [Limit Functions].
Select functions to which you want to apply Department ID
Management, except for Copy ➞ press [OK].
Optional Equipment
7
The functions for which the Limit Functions setting has been set to ‘Off’ are not
subject to Department ID Management, except for printing.
7-52
Card Reader-C1
7
Press [Limit Impressions] to set the print restrictions ➞ press
[Done].
This validates the impression limit set in step 4.
NOTE
To set the print restriction, you must create an impression limit in step 4.
8
Press [OK].
Optional Equipment
7
9
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Card Reader-C1
7-53
Checking and Printing Counter Information
You can display and also print a list of the print total count per department.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Dept.
ID Management].
If a System Manager ID/Password is set, press [System Settings] ➞ enter the
System Manager ID and System Password ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
2
Press [Print Totals].
3
Check or print the list of print totals.
Optional Equipment
7
The print total with the Department ID left blank (not displayed) is the total
number of prints from a computer that does not correspond with a stored
Department ID (unknown ID).
7-54
Card Reader-C1
● When only checking the counter:
❑ Press [ ▼] or [▲] to display the desired department ➞ check the print totals.
● When printing the displayed list:
❑ Press [Print List] ➞ [Yes] when the screen below appears.
Optional Equipment
7
If you do not want to print, press [No].
The screen below appears during printing.
Card Reader-C1
7-55
NOTE
• If plain or recycled paper (11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR size) is loaded in a paper
drawer that has been set to ‘On’ after being specified as [Other] on the Drawer
Eligibility for APS/ADS screen, you can print a list. (See “Setting a Paper Drawer for
Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching,” on p. 3-14.)
• To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
• To close the screen, press [Done].
Optional Equipment
7
4
Press [Done].
5
Press [OK].
6
7-56
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Card Reader-C1
Erasing Print Totals
The following instructions describe how to erase the print totals for a stored
department when the Card Reader-C1 is being used.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Dept.
ID Management].
If a System Manager ID/Password is set, press [System Settings] ➞ enter the
System Manager ID and System Password ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
Press [Print Totals].
7
Optional Equipment
2
Card Reader-C1
7-57
● When erasing the print total for one particular department:
❑ Select the department whose Print Total you want to erase ➞ press [Clear].
● When erasing all counts:
❑ Press [Clear All Totals].
Optional Equipment
7
7-58
Card Reader-C1
3
Press [Yes].
If you do not want to erase the counter, press [No].
The message <Erased.> appears on the touch panel display for approximately
three seconds.
4
Optional Equipment
7
Press [Done].
Card Reader-C1
7-59
5
6
Press [OK].
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Setting to Accept Print Jobs with an Unknown ID
7
Optional Equipment
You can decide whether or not to print documents from a computer that does not
correspond with a stored Department ID.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘On’.
1
Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Dept.
ID Management].
If a System Manager ID/Password is set, press [System Settings] ➞ enter the
System Manager ID and System Password ➞ press ID (ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
7-60
Card Reader-C1
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
[On]: Allows the machine to output prints from computers that do not support a
Department ID.
[Off]: Allows the machine to output prints from computers that support a
Department ID.
The selected mode is set.
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
7
Optional Equipment
3
Card Reader-C1
7-61
Optional Equipment
7
7-62
Card Reader-C1
Appendix
8
CHAPTER
Sample Reports and Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Send Job List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
TX Report/TX Error Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Activity Report TX/RX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Copy Log List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Print Log List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Forwarding Conditions List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Registered LDAP Server List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Address Book List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
User’s Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Paper Deck-G1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Puncher Unit-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Copy Tray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Card Reader-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart . . . . . . .8-19
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
8-1
Sample Reports and Lists
Send Job List
You can view a listing of Send Jobs and their status. The Send Job List can be
printed from the System Monitor screen. (See “Printing the Send Job Status/Log,”
on p. 2-19.)
NOTE
Please note that the addresses in the above report are fictitious.
8
Appendix
■ SET TIME
Prints date and time each send job was accepted (24-hour notation).
■ ST. TIME
Prints the time the send job was started (24-hour notation).
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
Prints the address of the recipient.
File path is printed on a second line.
* If the address and/or file path exceeds the column capacity, the address and/or file path
is truncated.
■ DESTINATION ID
Prints the abbreviated name of the recipient.
* If the abbreviation exceeds the column capacity, the abbreviation is truncated.
■ JOB NO.
Prints a four digit number, which is automatically assigned when the send document is
accepted.
8-2
Sample Reports and Lists
■ MODE
Prints the communication type and method.
Communication type: TX
*If there is a Forwarding Job No., it is printed on the second line.
Communication method: FTP/SMB/IPX/BOX/I-FAX/MAIL
■ PGS.
Prints the number of pages of the original that were sent normally to the remote party.
TX Report/TX Error Report
A Send Result Report can be printed when a send job is complete. A Send Result
Report can also be printed along with a portion of the sent document. By default,
the report is printed when an error occurs. However you can also specify it be
printed after every send job or not printed at all. (See “Send Result Report (TX
Report),” on p. 3-68.)
NOTE
• The default settings are as follows:
- Send Result Report: ‘For Error Only’
- Error Copy Print: ‘On’
Appendix
8
• Please note that the addresses in the above report are fictitious.
■ JOB NO.
Prints a four digit number, which is automatically assigned when the sending document is
accepted.
■ DEPT. ID
When a Department ID is set, it is listed in a log.
Sample Reports and Lists
8-3
■ ST. TIME
Prints the date and time (24-hour notation) that the send job was started.
■ PGS.
Prints the number of pages of the original that were sent to the remote party.
■ SEND DOCUMENT NAME
Prints the document name entered when specifying the send setting for the document.
■ TX/RX INCOMPLETE
Prints the name and address of the sending destination to which you have not finished
sending.
* If the abbreviation exceeds the display capacity, only the first characters are shown.
■ TRANSACTION OK
Prints the name and address of the sending destination to which you have finished
sending.
* If a field exceeds its display capacity, only those characters that fit on the display are
printed.
■ ERROR
When a sending error occurs, the name and address of the sending destination are
printed.
* If a field exceeds its display capacity, only those characters that fit on the display are
printed.
Appendix
8
8-4
Sample Reports and Lists
Activity Report TX/RX
This function enables you to print a log of all Send and Receive jobs. You can select
whether to print the report after every 100 jobs (Auto Print), or at a specific time
(Daily Activity Report Time). You can print Send or Receive job logs separately. You
can also print an Activity Report manually from the System Monitor screen. (See
“Printing the Send Job Status/Log,” on p. 2-19.)
NOTE
• The default settings are as follows:
- Auto Print: ‘On’
- Daily Activity Report Time: ‘Off’
- Send/Receive Separate: ‘Off’
Appendix
8
• Please note that the addresses in the above report are fictitious.
■ DEPT. ID
When a Department ID is set, it is listed in a log.
A log of send jobs is printed for each ID.
■ ST. TIME
Prints the date and time (24-hour notation) that the send job was started. (An asterisk (*)
indicates that you have already printed a report for that transmission.) If user
authentications of MEAP are performed, the user names are displayed below the start
time. When the machine cannot specify the users (for example, when using the auto
forwarding mode), the user names are not displayed.
Sample Reports and Lists
8-5
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
Prints the address of the recipient.
File (FTP, SMB, IPX) communication services:
File path is printed on a second line.
* If the address and/or file path exceeds the column capacity, the address and/or file path
is truncated.
■ DESTINATION ID
Prints the abbreviated name of the recipient.
* If the abbreviation exceeds the column capacity, the abbreviation is truncated.
■ JOB NO.
Prints a four digit number, which is automatically assigned when the transaction is
accepted.
■ MODE
Prints the communication type and service name.
Communication type: TX/RX
Communication service: FTP/SMB/IPX/I-FAX/MAIL
■ PGS.
Prints the number of pages of the original that were sent normally to the remote party.
■ RESULT
Prints <OK>, <NG>, or < -- > plus the elapsed communication time.
If <NG> is printed, the error code is printed on the second line.
* For sending by e-mail or I-Fax, the symbol < -- > indicates that sending was confirmed
as far as the server or recipient (DSN was successful). (The end code may not be
printed depending on the value set for the service mode switch.)
Appendix
8
8-6
Sample Reports and Lists
Copy Log List
The copy logs are printed as a report. You can print a Copy Log List from the
System Monitor screen. (See “Printing the Copy and Print Job Logs,” on p. 2-10.)
■ JOB NO.
Prints the four digit number which is automatically assigned when a Copy job is accepted.
■ TIME
Prints the date and time, in 24-hour notation, when a Copy job was completed.
■ SHEET x COPIES
Prints the number of pages of originals and number copies.
■ DEVICE NAME
Prints the name of the device used for copying.
<LOCAL COPY> is printed when this machine is used for copying. <Cascade Copy> is
printed when Cascade Copy is used. The output device name is printed when Remote
Copy is used.
■ RESULT
Prints <OK> or <NG>.
If <NG> is printed, the error code or <STOP> is also printed next to <NG>.
Sample Reports and Lists
8-7
8
Appendix
■ DEPT. ID
If a Department ID is set, it is listed in a log. Copy logs are printed for each Department ID.
Print Log List
The print log is printed as a report. You can print a Print Log List from the System
Monitor screen. (See “Printing the Copy and Print Job Logs,” on p. 2-10.)
■ DEPT. ID
If a Department ID is set, it is listed in a log. Print logs are printed for each Department ID.
8
Appendix
■ JOB NO.
Prints the four digit number which is automatically assigned when a Print job is accepted.
■ TIME
Prints the date and time, in 24-hour notation, when a Print job was completed.
■ JOB NAME
Prints the name of a printed document or type of job.
■ USER
Prints the name of the user who performed the print job.
■ PGS.
Prints the number of pages of the original.
■ RESULT
Prints <OK> or <NG>.
If <NG> is printed, the error code or <STOP> is also printed next to <NG>.
8-8
Sample Reports and Lists
Forwarding Conditions List
You can print the contents of the Forwarding Settings. You can also print a
Forwarding Conditions List manually whenever necessary. (See “Printing a
Forwarding Settings List,” on p. 4-86.)
8
Appendix
NOTE
Please note that the addresses in the above report are fictitious.
Sample Reports and Lists
8-9
Registered LDAP Server List
You can print the contents of the registered LDAP server settings. You can print a
Registered LDAP Server List manually whenever necessary. (See “Printing LDAP
Server Settings,” on p. 4-114.)
.
Appendix
8
NOTE
For more information on specifying LDAP Server Settings, see “LDAP Server Settings,”
on p. 4-97.
8-10
Sample Reports and Lists
Address Book List
You can print the contents of Address Books 1 to 10 or the one-touch buttons
stored in the Address Book Settings. You can print the Address Book List manually
whenever necessary. (See “Printing the Address Book List,” on p. 3-75.)
NOTE
Please note that the addresses in the above report are fictitious.
■ CLASS
Prints the registered destination class.
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
• If the medium is File:
Shows the host name on the first line, and the folder path on the second line.
• If the medium is Mail Box:
Shows the inbox number.
• If the medium is I-Fax or e-mail:
Prints the I-Fax address or e-mail address.
• If the medium is Group:
Shows each of the registered recipients in order starting on the second line.
* If files are registered, the information normally shown on the second line is not shown.
Sample Reports and Lists
8-11
8
Appendix
■ DESTINATION NAME
Prints the name of the registered destination.
When printing the content of a one-touch button, the number of the one-touch button is
printed in the first line.
User’s Data List
The User’s Data List shows all the registered Communications Settings, Report
Settings, and System Manager Settings in the Additional Functions mode. You can
print the list whenever you want. (See “Printing the Additional Functions Settings
List,” on p. 3-78.)
Appendix
8
8-12
Sample Reports and Lists
Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or
future release.
Main Unit
Name
Canon imageRUNNER 6020i/5020i, imageRUNNER 6020/5020
Type
Console
Platen Glass
Stationary
Photoconductive Material
A-Si
Copying System
Electrostatic Transfer System
Developing System
Toner Projection System
Maximum Print Speed
imageRUNNER 6020i, 6020: 60 cpm (LTR)
imageRUNNER 5020i, 5020: 50 cpm (LTR)
Fixing System
Heat Roller system
Resolution
Reading
600 dpi x 600 dpi
Writing
approx. 1200 dpi x 600 dpi
Printing approx. 2400 dpi x 600 dpi
Number of Tones
256
Acceptable Paper Stock
Plain Paper
2
Paper Drawer 1, 2: 17 lb bond to 110 lb index (64 g/m
to 200 g/m2)
2
Paper Drawer 3, 4: 17 lb bond to 24 lb bond (64 g/mto 90 g/m2)
Stack Bypass:
17 lb bond to 110 lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)
Transparency*, Tracing paper*, Labels*, Heavy, Recycled, Color,
Letterhead, Bond, 3-Hole Punch (*Stack Bypass selected)
Acceptable Originals
Sheets, books, 3-dimensional objects (Up to 4.4 lb bond or 2 kg)
Maximum Original Size
11" x 17"
Paper Sizes
Paper Drawer 1, 2: LTR
Paper Drawer 3, 4: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, and STMTR
Only the paper sizes in paper drawer 3 can be changed.
Stack Bypass:
11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, and STMTR
Free-size: 4" x 5 7/8" to 11 5/8" x 17"
(100 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm)
Non-Image Areas
Leading Edge: 1/8" (4.0 mm)
Left and Right Side: 1/8" (2.5 mm)
Trailing Edge: 1/8" (2.0 mm)
Specifications
8-13
Appendix
8
Warm-Up Time
When the main power is turned ON: 5 minutes max.
Activation time from Sleep Mode: 5 minutes max.
Activation time from Energy Saver mode: None: 0 second
–10% Mode: approx. 50 seconds
–25% Mode: approx. 90 seconds
–50% Mode: approx. 180 seconds
*Activation time for each mode is a rough standard until the
machine is ready to print after canceling the mode. Activation time
may vary depending on the conditions which the machine is being
used. (In all cases, at a room temperature of 68°F.)
First Copy Time
Platen glass selected: 3.8 seconds max.
Maximum Copy Speed
imageRUNNER
6020i, 6020
Direct
11" x 17"
30 cpm
LGL
36 cpm
LTR
60 cpm
LTRR
42 cpm
STMTR
60 cpm
Reduction
11" x 17" → STMTR (50%)
60 cpm
11" x 17" → LTRR (64%)
42 cpm
11" x 17" → LGL (73%)
36 cpm
LGL → LTR (78%)
42 cpm
Enlargement LGL → 11" x 17" (121%)
30 cpm
LTRR → 11" x 17" (129%)
30 cpm
STMT→ 11" x 17" (200%)
30 cpm
Except the stack bypass.
Appendix
8
Magnification
Direct
Reduction
Enlargement
8-14
Specifications
imageRUNNER
5020i, 5020
30 cpm
36 cpm
50 cpm
39 cpm
50 cpm
50 cpm
39 cpm
36 cpm
39 cpm
30 cpm
30 cpm
30 cpm
1:1(± 0.5%)
1:0.789 (LGL → LTR)
1:0.733 (11" x 17" → LGL/11" x 15" → LTR)
1:0.647 (11" x 17" → LTR)
1:0.500 (11" x 17" → STMT)
1:0.250
1:1.214 (LGL → 11" x 17")
1:1.294 (LTR → 11" x 17")
1:2.000 (STMT → 11" x 17")
1:4.000
Paper Feeding System
Paper Drawer 1, 2 (1,500 sheets each; 20 Ib bond (80 g/m2))
Paper Drawer 3, 4 (550 sheets each; 20 Ib bond (80 g/m2))
Stack Bypass (Stack Bypass Tray: 50 sheets; 20 Ib bond (80 g/m 2);
stack approx. 1/4" (5 mm) high)
Exposure Control
Automatic Exposure Control or Manual Exposure Control
Multiple Copies
999 Sheets max.
Paper Output
face down
Power Source
120 V AC, 60 Hz, 15 A
Max Power Consumption
1.5 kW max
Dimensions (H x W x D)
44 3/4" x 25 3/8" x 29 1/4" (1,136 mm x 643 mm x 743 mm)
Installation Space
(W x D)
52 5/8" x 29 1/4" (1,335 mm x 743 mm) (Dimensions for each tray
and stack bypass tray are given in their extended conditions.)
Weight
Approx. 462 lb (210 kg)
Feeder
Originals
11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, and STMT
Original Paper Weights
One-sided scanning: 10 to 32 lb bond (38 to 128 g/m2)
Two-sided scanning: 13 to 32 lb bond (50 to 128 g/m2)
Original Tray Capacity
100 sheets
Original Replacement
Speed
55 sheets/minute (LTR)
Power Source
From the Main Unit
Power Consumption
When Active: 48 W max.
When Not Active: 2.5 W max.
Dimensions (H x W x D)
5 7/8" x 22 1/4" x 21 1/2" (149 mm x 565 mm x 545 mm)
Weight
Approx. 30.8 lb (14 kg)
Appendix
8
Paper Deck-G1
Paper Deck Capacity
3,500 sheets (20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
Power Source
From the Main Unit
Power Consumption
40 W
Dimensions (H x W x D)
22 5/8" x 12 3/4" x 23" (574 mm x 323 mm x 583 mm)
Weight
Approx. 101 lb (46 kg)
Acceptable Paper Size
LTR
Specifications
8-15
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2
Paper
17 lb bond to 110 lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)
Saddle Stitcher Unit*: 17 lb bond to 20 lb bond (64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2)
(For cover sheets only*: 17 lb bond to 110 lb index (64 g/m2 to 200
g/m2))
Capacity Per Tray
[Non-Collate Mode]
LTR, STMTR :
5 3/4" (147 mm)
(equivalent to 1,000 sheets 20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
11" x 17", LGL, LTRR : 2 7/8" (74 mm)
(equivalent to 500 sheets 20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
[Collate Mode]/[Group Mode]
LTR, STMTR :
5 3/4" (147 mm)
(equivalent to 1,000 sheets 20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
11" x 17", LGL, LTRR : 2 7/8" (74 mm)
(equivalent to 500 sheets 20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
[Staple Mode]
LTR :
30 sets or 4 3/8" (110 mm)
(equivalent to 750 sheets 20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
11" x 17", LGL, LTRR :
30 sets or 2 7/8" (74 mm)
(equivalent to 500 sheets 20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
[Non-Collate]/[Collate]/[Group] with different paper sizes
1 3/4" (44 mm)
(equivalent to 300 sheets 20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
[Staple] with different paper sizes
30 sets or 7/8" (22 mm)
(equivalent to 150 sheets 20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
[Saddle Stitch]*
1 to 5 sheets: 25 sets
6 to 10 sheets: 15 sets
11 to 15 sheets: 10 sets
Max. Stapling Capacity
Staple Unit
LTR:
50 sheets
11" x 17", LGL, LTRR: 30 sheets
Saddle Stitcher Unit*: 15 sheets
Available Staple Size
Corner Staple:
Double Staple:
Available Offset Sizes
11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR
Available Saddle Stitch
Sizes*
11" x 17", LTRR
Saddle Stitcher Folding
Method*
Roller Pressure Folding
Appendix
8
8-16
Specifications
11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR
11" x 17", LTR
Saddle Stitcher Folding
Mode*
V-fold
Power consumption
170 W max.
Power Source
From the Main Unit
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Finisher
Installation Location
(W x D)
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2
61 3/8" x 29 1/4" (1,559 mm x 743 mm)
Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2 + Puncher Unit-B1
64 3/8" x 29 1/4" (1,634 mm x 743 mm)
Saddle Finisher-F2
(The width includes necessary space for removing paper jams.)
72 5/8" x 29 1/4" (1,844 mm x 743 mm)
Weight
Finisher-F1:
Approx. 70.5 lb (32 kg)
Saddle Finisher-F2:
Approx. 114 lb (52 kg)
Finisher-F1 + Puncher Unit-B1: Approx. 82.4 lb (37.4 kg)
Saddle Finisher-F2 + Puncher Unit-B1:
Approx. 126 lb (57.4 kg)
41 3/8" x 26 3/8" x 24 1/4"
(1,052 mm x 669 mm x 614 mm)
Finisher + Puncher Unit-B1 41 3/8" x 29 3/8" x 24 1/4"
(1,052 mm x 744.5 mm x 614 mm)
*Saddle Finisher-F2 only.
Puncher Unit-B1
Appendix
8
Paper
17 Ib bond to 110 lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)
Hole Punching System
Sequential processing system
Punch Hole Quantity,
Hole Diameter
2 holes/3 holes, 8±0.5 mm
Distance Between Punch
Holes
3 holes: 4 1/4" (108 mm)
2 holes: 2 3/4" (70 mm)
Available Paper Sizes
3 holes: 11" x 17", LTR
2 holes: LGL, LTRR
Punch Waste Tray
Capacity
Approx. 3,000 sheets (20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
Power Consumption
120 W max
Power Source
From the Finisher
Dimensions (H x W x D)
34 7/8" x 3" x 24 1/4" (886 mm x 75.5 mm x 614.4 mm)
Weight
Approx. 11.9 lb (5.4 kg)
Specifications
8-17
Copy Tray-C3
Capacity
250 sheets, 20 Ib bond (80 g/m2)
Dimensions (H x W x D)
4" x 18 3/8" x 13 3/8" (100 mm x 465 mm x 340 mm)
Weight
Approx. 1.4 Ib (670 g)
Card Reader-C1
Card to be used
Magnetic type card, Optical type card
Card readout method
Magnetic/Optical readout
Magnetic card reading
direction
Inserting Direction
Store/replay
Replay
Power source
From main unit
Dimensions (H x W x D)
1 1/4" x 3 1/2" x 4 (32 mm x 88 mm x 100 mm)
Weight
Approx. 10.4 oz (295 g)
Specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.
Appendix
8
8-18
Specifications
Relationship between Original Orientation and
Preprinted Paper Output Chart
Please use this chart when printing on paper preprinted with logos.
■ When You Want to Set the Left Side Stapling
Confidential
Output
Example
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
LTR
11"x17", LGL
LTR
laitnedifnoC
laitnedifnoC
Orientation
in Paper
Drawer 1, 2
laitnedifnoC
laitnedifnoC
8
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
laitnedifnoC
Orientation in
Stack Bypass/
Paper Deck
laitnedifnoC
laitnedifnoC
Orientation
in Paper
Drawer 3, 4
11"x17", LGL
Appendix
Original/
Paper
Orientation,
Settings
Orientation on
the Platen Glass
Staple Setting
Corner:Top Left
Double:Left
Corner:Top Right
Double:Right
Corner:Top Left
Corner:Top Left
Double:Left
Corner:Top Left
Double:Left
Corner:Top Left
Double:Left
Corner:Top Right
Corner:Top Right
Double:Right
Orientation in
the Feeder
Staple Setting
Auto Orientation
Setting
Either On or Off
Either On or Off
Either On or Off
(Set to On when
paper orientation
in paper drawers
is vertical.)
Either On or Off
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart
8-19
■ When You Want to Set the Right Side Stapling
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
LTR
11"x17", LGL
LTR
11"x17", LGL
Confidential
laitnedifnoC
laitnedifnoC
Orientation
in Paper
Drawer 3, 4
Confidential
laitnedifnoC
Orientation
in Paper
Drawer 1, 2
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Orientation in
Stack Bypass/
Paper Deck
Confidential
Original/
Paper
Orientation,
Settings
Confidential
Confidential
Output
Example
Confidential
Confidential
Orientation on
the Platen Glass
Staple Setting
Appendix
8
Corner:Top Right
Double:Right
Corner:Top Left
Double:Left
Corner:Top Right
Corner:Top Right
Double:Right
Corner:Top Right
Double:Right
Corner:Top Right
Double:Right
Corner:Top Left
Corner:Top Left
Double:Left
Orientation in
the Feeder
Staple Setting
Auto Orientation
Setting
8-20
Either On or Off
Either On or Off
Either On or Off
(Set to On when
paper orientation
in paper drawers
is vertical.)
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart
Either On or Off
Index
A
Accept Jobs With Unknown ID ..........................................................................4-30
Access Number Management ................................................................................... 4-54
Activity Report....................................................................................................... 3-71
Activity Report TX/RX .............................................................................................. 8-5
Adding Toner ......................................................................................................... 5-12
Additional Functions key.......................................................................................... 1-26
Additional Functions screen ..................................................................................... 1-12
Address Book List ..........................................................................................3-75
Adjustment/Cleaning............................................................................................... 3-60
Always Send Notice for RX Errors .............................................................................. 4-32
Audible Tones........................................................................................................ 3-12
Auto Clear Setting .................................................................................................. 3-10
Auto Clear Time...................................................................................................... 3-54
Auto Offline........................................................................................................... 4-91
Auto Online ........................................................................................................... 4-90
Auto Online/Offline ................................................................................................. 4-90
Auto Sleep Time ..................................................................................................... 3-53
, 7-61
, 8-11
Appendix
8
B
Back.................................................................................................................... 1-40
Booklet Tray.......................................................................................................... 7-11
Breaker ................................................................................................................ 1-24
Index
8-21
C
Cancel ................................................................................................................. 1-40
Card Reader-C1 ..................................................................................................... 7-47
Cassette-P3 ......................................................................................................... 5-30
Clear key.............................................................................................................. 1-26
Clear Message Board.............................................................................................. 4-88
Clip Holder ............................................................................................................ 1-26
Common Settings..................................................................................................... 3-8
Communications Settings ........................................................................................ 4-32
Consumable.................................................................................................. 5-28
, 7-42
Control Panel ........................................................................................................ 1-23
Control Panel Power Switch.............................................................................. 1-32
, 1-38
Control Panel Power Switch (Sub Power Supply)........................................................... 1-26
Copy ................................................................................................................... 1-10
Copy Log List .......................................................................................................... 8-7
Copy Tray-C3 ........................................................................................................ 7-43
Counter Check .............................................................................................. 1-27
, 1-30
Counter Check key................................................................................................. 1-26
D
Daily Timer Settings................................................................................................ 3-57
Date & Time Settings .............................................................................................. 3-49
Default Subject...................................................................................................... 4-32
Department ID ....................................................................................................... 1-48
Dept. ID Management .......................................................................................4-9
Details ................................................................................................................... 2-8
Device ................................................................................................................... 2-4
Device Information Settings ..................................................................................... 4-56
Display Contrast Dial ...................................................................................... 1-26
Done ................................................................................................................... 1-40
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS.................................................................................. 3-15
Appendix
8
E
E-mail/I-Fax Settings .............................................................................................. 4-33
Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode ........................................................................... 3-21
Energy Saver key .................................................................................................. 1-26
Energy Saver Mode ................................................................................................ 3-20
Error Code ............................................................................................................ 6-37
Error Indicator ....................................................................................................... 1-26
Exposure Recalibration ........................................................................................... 3-65
8-22
Index
, 7-50
, 1-42
F
Feeder ................................................................................................................. 1-23
Feeder Cleaning ..................................................................................................... 5-25
Feeder Cover......................................................................................................... 1-25
Finisher-F1............................................................................................................ 7-10
Forwarding Conditions List ........................................................................................ 8-9
Forwarding Settings ................................................................................................ 4-58
Front Cover ...................................................................................................1-24
Front Cover of the Puncher Unit................................................................................. 7-11
Full Mode TX Timeout .............................................................................................. 4-32
, 7-11
G
Guide key ............................................................................................................. 1-26
Guide Screen ........................................................................................................ 1-17
I
ID key .................................................................................................................. 1-26
Inch Entry............................................................................................................. 3-13
Initial Function ........................................................................................................ 3-8
Initialize Common Settings ....................................................................................... 3-46
8
Appendix
J
Job Type ............................................................................................................... 2-3
Job/Print Monitor Area............................................................................................. 1-10
L
Language Switch.................................................................................................... 3-41
List of Error Messages ............................................................................................ 6-34
Loading Paper ........................................................................................................ 5-2
Log....................................................................................................................... 2-3
Low-power Mode Time ............................................................................................. 3-59
LTRR/STMT Original Selection .................................................................................. 3-23
Index
8-23
M
Mail Box ............................................................................................................... 1-10
Main Power Indicator .............................................................................................. 1-26
Main Power Switch ................................................................................................. 1-23
Manage/Access to Address Book ............................................................................. 4-52
Maximum Data Size For Sending ............................................................................... 4-32
MEAP .................................................................................................................. 1-10
MEAP Counter....................................................................................................... 1-28
MEAP Settings ...................................................................................................... 4-93
Memory Lock End Time ........................................................................................... 4-46
Memory Lock Start Time .......................................................................................... 4-42
Memory RX Inbox Password..................................................................................... 4-38
Memory RX Inbox Settings....................................................................................... 4-38
Message board...................................................................................................... 1-18
Multifunctional Operations ....................................................................................... 1-74
N
Next .................................................................................................................... 1-40
Numeric keys ........................................................................................................ 1-26
O
Appendix
8
Offset Jobs .......................................................................................................... 3-44
OK ...................................................................................................................... 1-40
Open Button ........................................................................................................... 7-3
Original Output Area ....................................................................................... 1-23
Original Set Indicator .............................................................................................. 1-25
Original Supply Tray ....................................................................................... 1-23
Output Tray A........................................................................................................ 7-11
Output Tray B........................................................................................................ 7-11
8-24
Index
, 1-25
, 1-25
P
Page Number Position Adjustment ............................................................................. 3-66
Paper Deck ............................................................................................................ 7-3
Paper Deck-G1 ....................................................................................................... 7-3
Paper Drawer 1, 2 ................................................................................................... 1-23
Paper Drawer 3, 4 ................................................................................................... 1-23
Paper Jams............................................................................................................ 6-2
Paper Supply Indicator ............................................................................................. 7-3
Password ............................................................................................................. 1-48
Platen Glass ......................................................................................................... 1-24
Print Jobs ............................................................................................................. 2-33
Print Log List .......................................................................................................... 8-8
Print MDN (Message Disposition Notification)/DSN (Delivery Status Notification) on Receipt . 4-32
Print System Information ......................................................................................... 4-95
Print Totals ...................................................................................................4-22
, 7-57
Printing Priority ...................................................................................................... 3-26
Priority Printing ...................................................................................................... 2-31
Processing/Data Indicator ....................................................................................... 1-26
Puncher Unit-B1..................................................................................................... 7-10
R
Received Job ........................................................................................................ 2-21
Registered LDAP Server List .................................................................................... 8-10
Release Lever ........................................................................................................ 7-3
Remote UI............................................................................................................. 4-50
Report Settings...................................................................................................... 3-68
Reset key ............................................................................................................. 1-26
Reversed Display (Color) ......................................................................................... 3-43
Right Cover ........................................................................................................... 1-23
Routine Cleaning .................................................................................................... 5-17
Index
Appendix
8
8-25
S
Saddle Finisher-F2 ................................................................................................. 7-10
Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment............................................................................. 3-63
Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning ......................................................................... 3-62
Scan ................................................................................................................... 1-10
Secured Documents ............................................................................................... 2-35
Self-Diagnostic Display ........................................................................................... 6-34
Send ................................................................................................................... 1-10
Send Job.............................................................................................................. 2-12
Send Job List .......................................................................................................... 8-2
Send Result Report ................................................................................................ 3-68
Service Call Messages............................................................................................ 6-49
Slide Guide ........................................................................................................... 1-25
Specifications ....................................................................................................... 8-13
Spool..................................................................................................................... 2-5
Stack Bypass ....................................................................................................... 1-23
Stack Bypass Settings ........................................................................................... 1-69
Stack Bypass Standard Settings .............................................................................. 3-36
Standard Local Print Settings ................................................................................... 3-40
Start key .............................................................................................................. 1-26
Status ................................................................................................................... 2-3
Stop key .............................................................................................................. 1-26
Store Form for Form Composition............................................................................... 3-28
Store LDAP Server ................................................................................................. 4-97
Store Paper Type ................................................................................................... 3-17
System Manager Settings.......................................................................................... 4-3
System Monitor ..................................................................................................... 1-10
System Monitor screen ........................................................................................... 1-16
Appendix
8
T
Test Button........................................................................................................... 1-24
Time Until Unit Quiets Down...................................................................................... 3-56
Timer Settings ....................................................................................................... 3-48
Toner Supply Cover ................................................................................................ 1-24
Top Cover of the Puncher Unit .................................................................................. 7-11
Touch Panel Display ............................................................................................... 1-26
Tray Designation.................................................................................................... 3-24
TX Error Report........................................................................................................ 8-3
TX Report ............................................................................................................... 8-3
8-26
Index
U
Underside of the Platen Glass Cover .......................................................................... 1-24
Unit 1 (Fixing Transport Unit)..................................................................................... 1-24
Unit 2 (Duplexing Transport Unit) ............................................................................... 1-24
Upper Cover .......................................................................................................... 7-11
Use HTTP ............................................................................................................. 4-94
Use I-Fax Memory Lock ........................................................................................... 4-40
Use Send Via Server ............................................................................................... 4-33
User’s Data List .............................................................................................3-78
, 8-12
W
Wire Cleaning ........................................................................................................ 5-26
Z
Zoom Fine Adjustment ............................................................................................. 3-60
Appendix
8
Index
8-27
Appendix
8
8-28
Index
✂
System Management Mode of the imageRUNNER
6020i/5020i and imageRUNNER 6020/5020
The following pages regarding the use and operations of the System Manager
mode, should be cut out of the manual by the supervisor or the system manager.
You can set restrictions for the machine or manage the settings set by other users
in the System Settings from the Additional Functions screen. This mode is called
the System Management mode.
✂
The operations which can be managed in the System Management mode are:
• Mail
box Document Management
• Mail Box Settings
Entering the System Management Mode
When Department ID Management Is Enabled
✂
1
Enter the System Manager ID and System Password
using 0 - 9 (numeric keys).
❑ Press [Dept. ID] ➞ enter the System Manager ID.
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter the System Password.
❑ Press
ID
(ID).
✂
✂
The machine enters the System Management Mode.
✂
i
1
Press
✂
When Department ID Management Is Not Enabled
(Additional Functions).
Reset
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ID
0
C
Start
?
✂
Guide
Additional Functions
Clear
Press [System Settings].
✂
✂
✂
✂
2
ii
✂
3
Enter the System Manager ID and System Password
using 0 - 9 (numeric keys).
❑ Press [System Manager ID] ➞ enter the System Manager ID.
❑ Press [System Password] ➞ enter the System Password.
❑ Press
ID
(ID).
✂
✂
The machine enters the System Management Mode.
NOTE
Enter the number stored under System Manager Settings. (See “Specifying the
System Manager Settings (System Manager Settings),” on p. 4-3.)
✂
Canceling the System Management Mode
1
Press
ID
(ID).
Reset
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ID
0
C
Guide
?
Additional Functions
✂
Clear
Processing/Data
Be sure to press
Error
(Reset) after you press
ID
(ID).
The System Management Mode is canceled.
✂
iii
✂
The System Management Mode is also canceled when Auto Clear takes place.
The display returns to the screen of the function selected in the Auto Clear
Setting.
You can operate the inbox documents stored by users. For example, you can
control an inbox whose password was forgotten, delete unwanted documents, or
retrieve documents from an inbox secured by a password in case of an emergency.
1
✂
Managing Inbox in the System Management Mode
Enter the System Management Mode.
Reset
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ID
0
C
Start
Guide
?
Clear
Press [Mail Box].
3
Proceed to operate the inbox.
✂
✂
2
✂
Additional Functions
✂
(See the Mail Box Guide.)
iv
✂
Changing the Mail Box Settings in the System
Management Mode
You can change the mail box settings restricted with a password. For example, you
can initialize an unnecessary inbox, change the name of an inbox, or reset the
password of an inbox which the user has forgotten.
✂
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
Reset
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ID
0
C
Start
Guide
?
Additional Functions
Clear
✂
When the machine is already in the System Management mode,
press
(Additional Functions) and proceed to step 5.
If Department ID Management is enabled, enter the System Manager ID in the
[Dept. ID], also enter the System Password in the [Password] using 0 - 9
(numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
✂
✂
✂
v
✂
Press [System Settings].
✂
2
Enter the System Manager ID/Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press ID (ID).
0
-
9
✂
✂
3
The machine enters the System Management Mode.
✂
✂
NOTE
Enter the number stored under System Manager Settings. (See “Specifying the
System Manager Settings (System Manager Settings),” on p. 4-3.)
vi
✂
4
Press [Done].
✂
The display returns to the Additional Functions screen.
5
Press [Mail Box Settings] ➞ change the settings.
✂
(See Chapter 5, “Customizing Settings,” in the Mail Box Guide.)
✂
✂
✂
vii
viii
✂
✂
✂
✂
✂
✂
✂
Check Sheet for the Periodic Inspection of the
Breaker
This page should be cut out of the user’s guide and copied for future use.
After cutting out of the user’s guide, store this page in a safe place near the
machine.
■ How to Inspect the Breaker periodically
✂
Follow the procedure described in the “Periodic Inspection of the Breaker,” on p. xxv of the
imageRUNNER 6020i/5020i and imageRUNNER 6020/5020
Reference Guide, once or
twice a month.
■ How to Fill in this Check Sheet
Fill in the date of inspection, and the name of inspector.
When the inspection finished normally, write a check mark under <OK>.
If not, contact your service representative. (Also write a check mark under <NG>.)
Date of
Inspection
Inspector
Result
OK
NG
Date of
Inspection
Inspector
Result
OK
NG
✂
✂
✂
✂
x
✂
✂
✂
✂
✂
✂
・I
Pus_299
Black
PANTONE
299
Reference Guide
The contents of this guide are
Reference Guide
printed on 100% recycled paper.
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON U.S.A., INC.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
CANON CANADA INC.
6390 Dixie Road Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61 P.O. Box 2262, 1180 EG Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON FRANCE S.A.
17, quai du Président Paul Doumer 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON (U.K.) LTD.
Woodhatch, Reigate, Surrey, RH2 8BF, United Kingdom
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.
Palazzo L Strada 6 20089 Milanofiori Rozzano (MI) Italy
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
703 Waterford Way Suite 400 Miami, Florida 33126 U.S.A.
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney, N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
ENG
79 Anson Road #09-01/06, Singapore 079906
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD
9/F, The Hong Kong Club Building, 3A Chater Road, Central, Hong Kong
FA7-4486 (010)
062003IS3
C CANON INC. 2003
PRINTED IN JAPAN
Read this guide first.
Please read this guide before operating this equipment.
After you finish reading this guide, store it in a safe place for future reference.
ENG